Home

Platinum™ IP3 - Imagine Communications

1. DDR2 Memory Video Frame Po gt synchronizer H x DL Video DL gt B2A ProcAmp A2B Pp requires license key DL Demux SDI Rx Clock SDI In poi from Wideband XPT gt fant a pa SRCIH Montering Bypass Link A Link B ASI Detection DL Delay Lasi Fag Test Tone Generator Non PCM Data d v L N Loss ot Video N SDI Tx Primary Audio Audio e SDI Out Audio Sample Rate PCM x Audio Audio Multiplexer DL BS CRC Insertion Demuttiplexer gt gt Synchronizer amp gt i c o gt B wats Ve gt to Cable Driver De Embodder Fade Conversion E Delay ProcAmp Embedder Mux JE es or SFP Tx p Serializer Bypass Mux for ASI A ij EmbChEn Reide DDR2 Memory Non PCM Dat PCM Sample Rate Conversion e Allow embedding it Source Embedded is PCM gt for Tracking of Allow embedding it Source comes from TDM p Pt PX TDM Audio TDM Ir variable Video Sea TDM16 Audio to other delay only Allow embedding if Testtones are enabled kl IT Audio Processors in same FPGA 128 Channels Encapsulated Audio data is expected to be synchronous to Video Reference February 2015 Page 144 Proprietary and Confidential 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer Demultiplexer Modules PX HSRMX OBG Controllable Parameters The Plat
2. Max 1400mVpp EQ SERDES INA LMHO394 gt Gseoeo gt gt EQ SERDES INS LMHO394 gt Gseoe0 t EQ SERDES INS LMHO394 gt Gseoe0 il d EQ SERDES Ng LMH0394 gt Gseoeo gt DSBM DensiShied Nj EQ SERDES 8 Channels p ONS LMH0394 gt Gs2960 gt Mindspeed a 40x40 f M21125 HDBNC Ing E g i i EQ SERDES 2 NG LMHO394 gt Gseoeo g EQ SERDES V i LMHO394 gt Gseoeo gt EQ SERDES INS LMHO394 gt Gseoe0 gt e EQ SERDES Ne LMHO394 PI Gseoe0 al x V In9 Le DensiShield 8 Channels OPT 2 only Out9 A DensiShield N 8 Channels Card health and i Locall2C Controls Monitoring signal presence Control lt P PIPE toast lt gt PRU Power failure monitoring L 43 3V 7A e sava T I We 2 5V 1 5A p savs Onboard PN gt 42138 5v H 43 3VL 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential OUT 1A OUT 1B OUT 2A OUT 2B OUT 3A OUT 3B OUT 4A OUT 4B OUT 5A OUT 5B OUT 6A OUT 6B OUT 7A OUT 7B OUT 8A OUT 8B OUT 9A OUT 9B Input Modules PX IB February 2015 Page 92 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Output Modules PX OB Output Modules PX OB PX OB Output Module General Overview The PX OB is a generic Video Output Module designed for the IP3 Frame PX OB modules recondition SDI video received from crosspoint modules before distributing to va
3. M 182 upuenuemnduEng rm S 182 Output Specifications eeoa nir iA EA AOOO AOO AOAR 183 Output Power Consumption ssssssseseeenenenene enne nennen nenne nnnm nennen snsn sss sess sese se sess esse sss s sss s eis 184 PT MADIAX OBG Parameters ENEE 184 Analog Digital Audio Converter Modules with TDM eene 189 Audio A D Input Modules with TDM Capability PT ADCT IB essen 189 leg el EEEE 189 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 8 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Contents MSTA AION ERR 192 CONTROL gesiess 192 Controllable Parameters erect i ecett eveedeidavctentereeestaneledtedesdeadeavelesredee eit ve 192 Functional Block Diagram edet e eee e eegen d e egen de ege 196 PINQUE DIagratm unter eere etn ie ed mice eins 197 SPECIFICATIONS ECTETUR 197 Rower Sela itlnieusmeece 199 AES to Analog Audio Converter Output Modules with TDM Capability PT DACT OB 200 DD STAN Os pee ERES 200 fg IEN gt e TT 201 CONT ege Seege deeg ees Ae eege dees 201 Controllable Parameters seccscicscseceusvesetecveseiecusdegecivevsasdcasteeclevceasieeusdedoinebvesntsveveselacseasiecandeguedueseest aie 202 Functional Block Diasgram esses n aE nenn
4. OUTPUT 13 OUTPUT 14 OUTPUT 15 OUTPUT 16 BM Types ON ON ON ON e No Back Module installed at the back of this slot OR e Front Module not correctly mated with Back Module OFF OFF OFF ON e Back Module contains 16x HD BNC connectors ON OFF OFF ON e Back Module contains 8x SFP sockets OFF ON OFF ON e Back Module contains 2x DensiShield sockets and 8x HD BNC connectors ON ON OFF ON e Back Module contains 2x DensiShield sockets and 4x SFP sockets OFF OFF ON ON e Back Module contains 8x BNC connectors ON OFF ON ON e Back Module contains 2x DensiShield sockets OFF ON ON ON e Back Module contains 4x SFP sockets 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 279 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Module Interconnect PX BP 28 Module Interconnect PX BP 28 The PX BP 28 Module Interconnect MI is the central interconnect module for the IP3 frame The Input Output Crosspoint Resource Alarm and other modules are interconnected by copper traces in the Backplane Also DC power 24V and 5VL are distributed within the Backplane to all module s connector While the PX BP 28 is a passive module with no active components on the Module Interconnect there are fuses next to each module s connector These fuses are to prevent damage to module connectors and the Backplane See Fuses on the Module Interconnect PX BP 28 on page
5. a 111 Frame Syne Features ier eec Ee SEENEN KREE ESA aM cc dee rade e ae Meo du EEN bedecdes EEEa 111 Ne Ve Be En le Rent 112 Firmware Upgrade and Backup Image eene nn nennen 112 Activating PT FSDMX FUNCTIONS nennen nnnenr sten ener nn nnnrte stet enne te nens tesi ener 113 PT FSDMX IBG Controllable Parameters esses seen enne enne ener nnnns 116 Functional Block Diagram TEE 127 LED IMGICITOTS LO H 128 PT FSDMX IBG Specifications ccccscsccccecessesessnsecececseseaaeaeeececesseseaaeseceeecuseeeaaeaeceeecussessasaeeeeeens 128 P wer CONSUMPTION ERE 130 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 7 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Contents PT FSDX8C1D IBG Frame Sync Input Module with Matrix Expansion eene 130 PT FSDX8C1D IBG ele ECH e DEE 130 PT FSDX8C1ID IBG Input Module rectore rine ea pec oo pee is eco enhn 130 PT FSDX8C1D IBG Distributing Outputs to 2 Frames nennen ennemi 131 PT FSDX8C1D IBG Parameters ANEREN NEEN 132 PT FSDX8C1D IBG Specfications eene enne Nean ENNAN ANN ANEAN raiadas 132 Equalization Informatio EE 133 Power een ele ME 133 PX HSRMX OBG Frame Sync and Mux Output Module 134 PX HSRMX OBG Overvlew kA 134 PX HSRMX OBG Variants REM 134 PX HSRMX OBG Operation Modes esses eene enne nennnnnn essen entr anas sare n seni n nsns nnn
6. Silence Disable 1 8 Disables feature of generating AES e No silence when signal is not present Yes wideband mode only Threshold 1 8 Sets signal presence threshold all OxOO to Ox7F inputs Sample Frequency Adjust Adjusts internal mode sampling 0x00 to OxFF frequency Sampling Frequency Select Sets the sampling frequency when e 32 kHz in internal mode e 44 1 kHz e 48 kHz e 88 2 kHz e 96k Hz e 192 kHz 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 193 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Analog Digital Audio Converter Modules with TDM Parameter Description Options Audio Reference Selects AES reference input for e Sync 4 source e Sync 3 e Sync 2 e Sync 1 Parameter Hysteresis Sets hysteresis for parameters needing it O to 5 seconds in 500 ns steps Sync Select Sync 4 Sync 3 Sync 2 Sync 1 Crosspoint Type Determines crosspoint matrix requirement TDM XPT Wideband Both TDM and wideband Undefined Level Adjust 1 32 Indicates gain attenuation applied to mono channel 10dB to 30dB in 0 5dB increments Signal Presence 1 16 RO Reports presence or absence of valid signal determined by signal presence threshold signal absence before mute signal presence before mute release and tone generation Signal absent Signal present Ch A Presence 1 16 Reports absence
7. PT MADI4C OBG Power Consumption Table 85 PT MADI4C OBG Power Consumption Power Consumption 22W includes front module and back module PT MADI4X OBG Parameters Note SFP Parameters are applicable to the Optical module only Table 86 PT MADI4X OBG Parameters Path Parameter Name Description Options General Serial Number RO Displays the module s lt String gt unique identifier Submodule Temperature RO Indicates the lt String gt in temperature of the FPGA Degrees Celsius TDM Error Enable For in field diagnostics No only Yes TDM Error Count RO For in field diagnostics TDM Error count only Submodule Firmware Version Indicates MC software lt String gt RO version Submodule FPGA Version RO Indicates FPGA firmware lt String gt version SFP Wavelength lt 1 4 gt Reports wavelength of e N A Table Parameter fiber optical output e 1300 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 184 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Multichannel Audio Digital Interface MADI Modules Path Parameter Name Description Options Laser Status lt 1 4 gt Reports laser status e Enabled Table Parameter e Disabled e N A e Normal e Failed Laser Enable lt 1 4 gt Enables or disables fiber e Yes Table Parameter optical output e No SFP Type lt 1 2 gt Reports type of SFP e OP S
8. iagram PX AUX block di Figure 144 February 2015 Page 288 Proprietary and Confidential 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Sync Module Interconnect PX SYNC MI Sync Module Interconnect PX SYNC MI The PX AUX is a passive module with four connectors The module provides a passive connection between the MI Backplane PX BP 28 PT SYNC cards and Communications Backplane PX CBP The PX SYNC MI Sync Module e Connects the 4 Sync Reference input signals on the PX CBP to both PT SYNC slots e Connects the Sync Reference signals from the PT SYNC modules to the MI Backplane PX BP 28 e Connects 24V and 5VL from the MI Backplane to both PT SYNC slots Also serial communication from the Resource module PX RES is connected through the MI Backplane through the PX SYNC MI to the PT SYNC slots Provision has also been made to support e Genlock over Ethernet by routing a Sync signal RES SYNC from the Resource module to the PT SYNC slots e Audio synchronization of two IP3 frame Platinum PX SYNC MI 161 100511Q00 1 1 v MIMI Figure 145 PX SYNC MI Module 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 289 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Power Adapter Module PX PWR ADPTR Power Adapter Module PX PWR ADPTR The Power Adapter Module PX PWR ADPTR connects DC power 24V and 5VL and
9. 276 eema9mragadb 277 input ANd Input 277 Input 3 Input4 InpUt ET 277 Input o Input 7 Input B InpUt 9 orte rrt ones etie rs eine aee ue pesa ve ava epet epa eese annone ete peau RA 277 Output Module LEDS m 278 Output 1 Output E eeinetan get eee Ree q Read equ Podio ea equ Ie REPE I OE NEN ade de TREE TREE n eg nau abst ENARE SER 278 Output 7 Output 8 OUtpUt 9 EEN 278 Output 13 Output 14 Output 15 Output Ip 278 Module Interconnect PX BP 28 iis senkt erit nix HERE Va RENE PHR EVE FIF OR EE POD MP C KE 280 PX BP 28 ee EIER e 280 Fuses on the Module Interconnect PX BP 28 sess enne enne 281 Module Interconnect Installation tn gt 284 Auxiliary Module PER EE 286 PX AUX FUSES cose M 287 PX AUX Block MBIETHG IEEE EE EI RE 288 Sync Module Interconnect PX SYNC MI ccccccccccccccccccccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 289 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 11 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Contents Power Adapter Module PX DWRADPTR nn nnns 290 Fuses on the Power Adapter PX PWR ADPTR eene enne enne en nennen neni en nennen nnns 291 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 12 Platinum
10. Name Description Type Options Processed Audio Format Indicates if the audio RO e PCM Outputs gt channel is PCM or non e Non PCM Audio Channel PCM audio Tone Enables Tones RW je Off e 400 Hz e 2KHz e 4 KHz TDM Presence Indicates presence of RO e Yes TDM Audio Channels e No TDM Format Indicates format of TDM RO e PCM channels e g PCM e Non PCM Audio Channel Delay ms Specifies audio delay RW 0 3000 msinims per mono channel See steps Audio Synchronization on page 162 Level Adjust dB Adjusts the audio level RW 18dB 18 dB 0 in gain for each audio 0 1 dB steps channel Polarity Reversal Specifies whether the RW e No audio channel should be e Yes inverted Auto Mute Enables muting forthe RW e Off specified output channel e On Audio Channel Name Description Type Options Processed SRC Control Engages or disengages RW e Auto Outputs the sample rate e Enable Audio Stereo converter e Bypass Pair 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 155 Installation and Operation Manual Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer Demultiplexer Modules Name Description Type Options Delay Track By toggling one of the eight Reset Toggle A Reset Toggle B parameters of the selected SDI channel instance Audio Rd Wr pointers in the Audio Synchronizer affecting all eight Stereo pairs of the selected SDI channel will be reset
11. l PPDBOT4 I n WAFPITE YA Exe HE REI BEIEN sn Foe ya Hi E ISI Table 118 PX PD BOT Fuse Ratings Fuse Type Fuse Rating Part Number Fastblow 10 Amps 127 100013Q00 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 265 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual PX FRONT FAN and PX REAR FAN Modules PX FRONT FAN and PX REAR FAN Modules The IP3 Video Crosspoint and Data Switch modules are cooled by two separate hot swappable PX FRONT FAN modules one is located at the top of the frame and one at the bottom the two modules are mirror images of each other and are not interchangeable Each Front Fan module contains six individual fans There are seven large fans that exhaust heat from the rear of the frame The Rear Fan modules provide the main cooling for the entire frame power supplies and modules Operation of the Fan Modules Each PX FRONT FAN module contains six 40 mm2 fans The temperature of the IP3 Video Crosspoint PX 576x1024 3G module is communicated to the Front Fan modules the speed of the fans is adjusted to 2596 5096 or 7596 of their full speed based upon the temperature of the Video Crosspoint module If the Front Fan module detects a fan failure or loss of communication with the Resource module the other five fans in the array are automatically set to 7596 speed 10096 speed does not affect cooling performance CAUTION Front Fan m
12. OUT 12 OUT 14 Figure 46 PX HSR16C OBG This Back Module interfaces with the PX OB Output module to output16 electrical outputs See Output Modules PX OB see Input Modules PX IB on page 80 for details on the PX OB Output module Power Consumption Table 54 PX HSR16C OBG Power Consumption 24V Power Rail 11 7W 5V Power Rail 0 43W Total Power 12 13W PX HSR160 OBG Output Module The PX HSR160 OBG is a 16 channel SD HD 3G Digital Video Output Module with 8 SFP connectors OUT1 OUT 3 OUT 3 OUT A OUT S OUT 6 OUT7 OUT8 OUT9 OUT10 OUT 11 OUT 12 OUT 13 OUT 14 OUT 15 OUT 16 Figure 47 PX HSR160 OBG The PX HSR160 OBG has 8 SFP modules mounted on the metal back panel of the back module each containing two channels The PX HSR160 OBG interfaces with the PX OB Output module to output up to 16 optical outputs See Output Modules PX OB see Input Modules PX IB on page 80 for details on the PX OB Output module 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 106 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Digital Video Modules Power Consumption Table 55 PX HSR160 OBG Power Consumption 24V Power Rail 21 9W 5V Power Rail 0 43W Total Power 22 33W PX HSR16C OBG PX HSR160 OBG IBG Parametric Control The PX HSR16C OBG PX HSR160 OBG Module can be controlled via the Controller When you access a PX HSR16C OBG PX HSR160 OBG modul
13. RW e Reset Toggle A e Reset Toggle B Summing Specifies whether to sum the audio within a pair Left to Right the summed audio is placed in the right channel Right to Left the summed audio is placed in the left channel Both the summed audio is placed in both left and right channels RW e None e Right to left e Left to right e Both Swap Copy Specifies whether to swap or copy the audio within a pair able to swap left and right channels copy left channel to the right channel and copy the right channel to the left RW e No Swap e Swap e Right to left e Left to right Loss of TDM Aud Mode The mode of operation can be selected on a per Stereo Pair basis Instead of automatically switching back to the associated Embedded Audio Pair in case the TDM gets disconnected in the ATDM matrix the user can now select Silence instead e Embedded Audio e Silence 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 156 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Unprocessed Outputs Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer Demultiplexer Modules Name Description Type Options Unprocessed Reclocked Signal RO GU o EE Reports the presence of a Ne P the SDI signal that Yes becomes one of the unprocessed outputs RO Reclocked Data Rate Reports the data rate of EE
14. Return loss gt 18 dB typical from 5 MHz to 1485 MHz Equalization Adaptive cable equalization for up to 590 ft 150 m typical of Belden 1694A co axial cable HD SDI 3Gb s SMPTE 424M Format and image sample SMPTE 425M Level A structure SMPTE 372M Return loss gt 15 dB typical from 5 MHz to 1485 MHz gt 10 dB typical from 1485 MHz to 2970 MHz Equalization Adaptive cable equalization for up to 328 ft 100 m typical of Belden 1694A co axial cable Equalization Information The cable length is 300 meters Belden 8281 but the following applies in addition Note The PT FSDX8C1D IBG uses an extended 3G reach equalization When combined with Belden 8281 coaxial cable a pathological pattern and a non SPMTE424 6 1 7 compliant signal with excessive output amplitude excursions the source equalization may be reduced to between 200 and 300 m for SD SDI signal This condition typically only occurs with older SD SDI equipment having a 1uF capacitor on the output All recent and multi rate SD HD 3G equipment is compliant with the standard has at least a 4 7uF capacitor on the output and can achieve 300 m with 8281 cable and pathological pattern Power Consumption Table 73 PT FSDX8C1D IBG Power Consumption 24V Power Rail 52W 5V Power Rail 0 15W Total Power 52 15W 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 133 Plati
15. 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 283 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Module Interconnect PX BP 28 Figure 140 Fuses on right arm of PX BP 28 ICH J 10A Geh 3 S E GAR f ep G M wi Bech bere fi mr MT PPG ai 125V T 125V HEEL 10 4 125 i201 RFB Figure 141 Fuses at the center of the PX BP 28 Fuses on the PX BP 28 Fuse Type Fuse Rating Present on Part Number Slowblow 5 Amps Resource Card Slots 127 100010Q00 Slowblow 2 Amps Alarm Card Slots 127 100001Q00 Output Monitoring Slots Fastblow 10 Amps All Other Slots 127 100013Q00 Module Interconnect Installation The PX BP 28 Module Interconnect is installed into the IP3 frame at the Imagine Communications manufacturing facility This module cannot be replaced in the field 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 284 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Module Interconnect PX BP 28 Fuses can be replaced in the field however the Frame and External Power Supply frame must be powered down 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 285 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Auxiliary Module PX AUX Auxiliary Module PX AUX The Auxiliary Module PX AUX provides connectivity between MI Backplane PX BP 28 and the Front Fa
16. Two External Power Supply frames can be connected to the Platinum IP3 frame via DC power cables The DC power cables are connected to the Power Adapter boards The Alarm and I2C signals from the External Power Supplies are routed through the BackPlane MI to the PX ALARM DATA board General Purpose Interface GPI GPI connections to the PX ALARM module are via a Micro DB25 connector on the front card edge of the PCB The GPI Inputs are non isolated inputs A contact closure to ground asserts triggers the GPI Input External PX ALARM 1 5V H i L LI s 1 1kOhm Fr mi N A U yi I E U 1 TTL compatible nt A GPI Figure 18 GPI Inputs A 1k Ohm series resistor and clamping diode are connected to each Input to protect the Input from over voltage The GPI Outputs are electrically isolated using a Relay with 3 contacts Access to all 3 contacts of the relay have been provided to allow for defining the preferred method of signaling critical faults Table 21 GPI Output Descriptions NC Normally closed contact shorted with common when alarm condition exists or frame not powered NO Normally open contact shorted with common when alarm does not exist and frame is powered COMMON Reed Return of the Relay 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 55 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Alarm Expansion Module PX ALARM PX ALARM _
17. 75 BNC per IEC 169 8 via adaptor Impedance 750 Signal type AES3id SMPTE 276M AES frame rates from 32 kHz to 192 kHz Other 40 60 duty cycle digital signals from 2 Mb s to 25 Mb s Return loss gt 35 dB 0 1 MHz to 6 MHz gt 25 dB 6 MHz to 12 MHz Jitter lt 5ns Output amplitude 1 0 Vp p 10 into 75Q load DC offset O V 0 05 V Rise Fall times 30 ns 44 ns Propagation delay 170 ns 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 223 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Power Consumption AES Balanced Coaxial Modules with TDM Capability Table 103 PT AECT OB PT AEBT OB Power Consumption Power Consumption 6 5W 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 224 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Analog Composite Video Modules Analog Composite Video Modules Analog Video to SDI Decoder Input Modules PT DEC IB Operation Figure 100 PT DEC IB Module The PT DEC IB analog video to SDI decoder input module converts a block of eight composite NTSC or PAL video signals to high quality 10 bit serial digital signals SDI for routing within the Platinum platform This module also may be used for analog to analog video routing with the optional PM ENC OB or PT ENC OB encoder output module Hardware Reporting Each o
18. 80 us typically Power Consumption Table 105 PT DEC IB Power Consumption Power Consumption 13W SD to Analog Video Encoder Modules PT ENC OB Operation Figure 103 PT ENC OB Module The PT ENC OB is a SD to analog video encoder output module that converts a block of eight serial SD digital signals to composite NTSC or PAL video signals The PT ENC OB module accepts 32 serial digital SD video signals from the crosspoint module which are presented to four FPGA based deserializer chips Within each of the deserializer chips are two 4x1 multiplexers that switch the signals to the receiver blocks 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 231 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Analog Composite Video Modules The two receiver blocks within each of the deserializer chips perform the functions of extracting and locking all conversion functions to the bit serial clock To do this they e Use the internal and external PLL circuitry to descramble the SMPTE non return to zero NRZI SDI stream e Find the x3FF start of active video end of active video EAV SAV frame boundaries e Load the decoded data stream into a serial in parallel out SIPO shift register for exporting the data in 10 bit parallel form The 10 bit parallel data is loaded into the encoder chip on the rising edge of a 27 MHz pipeline clock where it is processed for digital
19. Sampling rates 32 kHz 192 kHz using external AES reference 32 kHz 44 1 kHz 48 kHz 88 2 kHz 96 kHz or 192 kHz using internal oscillators Gain stability 0 01 dB Frequency response 0 15 dB 20 Hz to 20 kHz Linearity deviation lt t 0 5 dB typical lt 1 0 dB worst case THD N lt 0 01 997 Hz 1 dBFS 17 dBm Idle channel noise 100 dBFS CCIR RMS typical 90 dBFS CCIR RMS worst case Dynamic range 100 dB CCIR RMS typical 90 dB CCIR RMS worst case Crosstalk 90 dB isolation 20 Hz to 20 kHz all hostile hostile channels driven at 1 dBFS 17 dBm Power Consumption Table 90 PT ADCT IB Power Consumption Power Consumption 24 7W 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 199 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Analog Digital Audio Converter Modules with TDM AES to Analog Audio Converter Output Modules with TDM Capability PT DACT OB Operation Figure 86 PT DACT OB Module The PT DACT OB audio D A output module provides the platform for AES digital to analog audio conversion within the Platinum routing system The TDM option provides 16 channels of conversion with enhanced Platinum I O module features The PT DACT OB provides greater conversion capacity made available via Time Division Multiplexing TDM 2015 Imagine
20. 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 30 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Introduction Control Features Platinum IP3 Controller Your Platinum IP3 router makes use of the most innovative control systems available on the market today The operating system used for the Platinum IP3 router is a real time embedded operating system that uses an interrupt driven and priority based task scheduling algorithm to control the operations of the Platinum IP3 router This means that switches will occur in a timely manner which allows the router to be used in broadcast facilities where timing is crucial to the success of the facility The new Control System is the driving force behind the Platinum IP3 routing system This new control system breaks the traditional constraints of hard levels and fixed partitions enabling unmatched flexibility in grouping and routing signals according to signal attributes a key need in complex multichannel audio facilities and mixed HD SD workflows Platinum IP3 Modules can be accessed and controlled via the web based Platinum IP3 Controller For details see the Platinum IP3 Controller User Manual 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 31 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Modules Modules Modules Overview The Platinum IP3 router s modular architecture consists of separate Input a
21. 3 3Replace the Fan blower 4 4Attach the Fan Connector and wires 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 73 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Audio TDM Crosspoint Module PX ATDM64 X28 Sync References e The ATDM module requires a PT SYNC module to be installed in the frame for distribution of an internal sync signal which uses up the SYNC4 distribution path e SYNC1 and SYNC2 are used for connecting Video References PX ATDM64 X28 Block Diagram Slot 1 Outputs 1 to 128 reer S Slot 1 Inputs 1 to 128 Slot 2 Outputs 1 to 128 e aS Slot 2 Inputs 1 to 128 Slot 3 Outputs 1 to 128 S L Slot E Inputs 1 to 128 0 p ern e O ec s e t t e 3 e ag 9 Audio Audio ipe o o e Crosspoint Crosspoin 53 Redundant Primary SS mA Ss e in ais ae a Bed e 5 ru e an me am mr DE E Keel e z J Eer e Slot 62 Outputs 1 to 1282 zx Slot 62 Inputs 1 to 128 Slot 63 Outputs 1101287 Slot 63 Inputs 1 to 128 Slot 64 Outputs 1 to 1282 Slot 64 Inputs 1 to 128 Figure 32 PX ATDM64 X28 Block Diagram Audio from each Input slot is routed to both ATDM Crosspoints and Outputs from the ATDM Crosspoints are routed to each Output Slot Both ATDM C
22. 720p 60 e 720p 60 1080i 50 e 1080i 50 e 1080p 60 1080p25 e 1080p 50 e 1080p 25 e 720p 50 e 625i 50 e 1080p 50DL 720p 59 94 e 720p 59 94 1080p 24 e 1080p 24 e 1080p 59 94 1080sF 24 e 1080sF 24 720p 50 e 720p 50 1080p 23 98 e 1080p 23 98 e 1080p 50 1080sF e 1080sF 23 98 23 98 In both Sync mode and Delay mode several controls are available to manipulate the output video signal Horizontal Phase To adjust the horizontal timing Vertical Phase To adjust the vertical timing Frame Offset Adjustable frame delay Force Freeze To manually freeze output video on first or second field interlaced standards or on the whole frame all standards 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 163 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer Demultiplexer Modules PX HSRMX OBG Configuration Follow these steps to configure your PX HSRMX OBG Output Frame Sync card p wow 8 Launch Navigator Discover your IP3 device and create a Routing System Run the DB Editor Create 2 Device Types HD Embedded and HD Video Follow the Wizard to create the HD Embedded Device type When creating the HD Embedded Device type in the Level Selection dialog box set the Number of embedded audio channels to 16 default is 10 Follow the Wizard to create the HD Video device type Open the IP3 Database Editor from Navigator Go to the Destina
23. 7A 20 10B 26 14B 15A 20 Gnd Gnd 2B Gnd 40 7A 4 10B Gnd 40 15A 4 3A 12 7A 11A 12 15A 3A 11 7B 32 11A 11 15B 32 3A Gnd 27 7B 17 11A Gnd 27 15B 17 3B 24 7BGnd 33 11B 24 15B Gnd 33 3B 39 8A 1 11B 39 16A 1 3B 4A 25 8A 2 11B 12A 25 16A 2 Gnd Gnd 4A 10 8A 8B 18 12A 10 16A 16B 18 Gnd Gnd 4A 9 8B 31 12A 9 16B 31 4B 23 8B 16 12B 23 16B 16 4B 38 12B 38 4B Gnd 37 12B Gnd 37 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 206 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Analog Digital Audio Converter Modules with TDM Specifications Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice Table 93 PT DACT OB Digital to Analog Audio Output Standard Version Item Specification Number of outputs 16 Output type Balanced Output connector DB 44 Impedance 660 Signal type Stereo analog audio Maximum output amplitude 28 dBu Full scale adjustment range O dBFS 13 dBu to 28 dBu in 1 dB steps 0 5 dB DC offset OV 0 05V Conversion type 128x oversampling fifth order delta sigma Resolution 24 bits AES frame rates 32 kHz 192 kHz Gain stability 0 01 dB Frequency response 0 25 dB 20 Hz to 20 kHz Linearity deviation lt 0 5 dB THD N lt 0 01 997 Hz 1 dBFS 23 dBu Idle channel noise lt 100 dBFS
24. CONTROL Cc COM NC l Si eee a Figure 19 GPI Outputs PIN 1 PIN 13 PIN 14 PIN 25 Figure 20 Micro DSUB connector pin numbering Micro Dsub Connector Pinouts Table 22 GPI Pinout Pin Description Pin Description 1 Remote in 3 14 Normally closed Power supply alarm 2 Common User defined 1 15 Normally open Power supply alarm 3 Normally closed User defined 1 16 Common Power supply alarm 4 Normally open User defined 1 17 Normally closed Fan alarm 5 Common User defined 2 18 Normally open Fan alarm 6 Normally closed User defined 2 19 Common Fan alarm 7 Normally open User defined 2 20 Floating 8 Common User defined 3 21 Remotein 1 9 Normally closed User defined 3 22 GND Common in 1 10 Normally open User defined 3 23 Floating 11 Common User defined 4 24 Remote in 2 12 Normally closed User defined 4 25 GND Common in 2 and 3 13 Normally open User defined 4 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 56 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Parameters Alarm Expansion Module PX ALARM PX ALARM DATA Parameters Table 23 PX ALARM DATA Parameters Category Name Description Type Options Root Power Good Informs the user if board is RO No experiencing any power issues Yes PS Alarm Reports if any o
25. Determines the number RW 0 17 frames Delay of frames the video is mode offset 0 16 frames Sync mode VERSION Software Version Indicates software RO String version Control FPGA Version Indicates firmware RO String version Processing FPGA Version Indicates firmware RO String version Functional Block Diagram This diagram shows the video and audio data paths for a single channel through the module This path is duplicated for each of the module s eight channels PT FSDMX IBG and PT FSDMXO IBG Data Flow Simple Bom TSG Memory Video Frame 5 Video Synchronizer ProcAmp Tequres icense ke PT FSDMX IBG SEET EE Ea DAK MNI SDI Rx Dolby E D Data Path e 1 Clock H gt Cabe Deserializer H Ta 1 Descrambler gt pisc eee ree Reframer d CRCIEDH Test Tone EQ Monitoring Generator H L Format Detection 1 Ooo Non PCM Dat M i NNME i SDI Tx x PT FSDMXO IBG CRC Insertion Audio Audio i Fiber Optical Back Module Le gt Synchronizer amp ss Multiplexer LineNum d Backplane SDI out Demultiplexer gt Sample Rate Delay Ies Embedder Insertion rive De Embedder sel Scrambler Serializer i PCM Audio Data Path ae Sec
26. Page 83 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Parameter Notes e Parameters can be enabled and or changed via CCS Navigator or the Platinum IP3 Controller e Parameters marked with the RO designator are read only Input Modules PX IB e Parameters marked Modules with SFPs Only apply only to optical modules such as PX HSR9O IBG Input Module on page 103 Module Root Level Parameters The following parameters are displayed at the root level when you click the Module in the parameter menu list Parameters and Faults view Parameters FaUtS Table 38 Module Parameters Name Description Type Options Software Version Software version of RO lt String gt micro controller Sync Select Selects which physical RW O Default sync port the module 1 uses as a reference 2 3 Note Actual signals are not synchronized to the reference This parameter only affects control timing Temperature Monitor module RO 40 140 deg C temperature Unit deg C Control FPGA Version Version of FPGA RO String Module Status 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 84 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Input Modules PX IB Name Description Type _ Options SFP Type Reports the type of SFP RO Invalid SFP OP SFP T1 13 1
27. Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual AES Balanced Coaxial Modules with TDM Capability AES Balanced Coaxial Modules with TDM Capability AES Balanced Coaxial Input Modules with TDM Capability PT AEBT IB PT AECT IB Operation Figure 90 PT AEBT IB Module 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 209 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual AES Balanced Coaxial Modules with TDM Capability Figure 91 PT AECT IB Module The AES input front module with TDM capability receives AES3 inputs with amplitude not exceeding 2 V from 2 Mb s to 25 Mb s terminated with 75Q with the coaxial back module installed with amplitude not exceeding 7 V from 2 Mb s to 25 Mb s terminated with 110Q with the balanced back module installed The front module recovers reslices and amplifies the signal before distributing it to the router s matrices This module provides a TDM version of all input signals to be distributed to the audio specific crosspoint module or optionally it can pass the first eight AES inputs to the wideband crosspoint It allows for the connection of 16 channels of AES digital audio using either a balanced or unbalanced coaxial back module routed within the Platinum platform Using the optional 8 or 16 channel 110Q balanced back module PT AEB IBP or 8 or 16 channel 75Q coaxial unbalanced back module PT AEC IBP the AES input front module with TDM will accept u
28. Standard Advanced Figure 14 Sync Mode Parameter IP3 Controller GUI Switch Triggering Switch triggering supports the use of independent AES NTSC PAL and tri level HD references The following reference types are supported Table 17 Switch Triggering Supported Reference Types 0 Unknown or Missing Reference Line 10 1 Analog 525 60 Line 10 2 Analog 525 60 1 001 Line 6 3 Analog 625 50 Line 7 4 1920x1080 601 Line 7 5 1920x1080 601 1 001 Line 7 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 48 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Resource Module PX RES 6 1920x1080 50I Line 7 7 1920x1080 30P Line 7 8 1920x1080 30P 1 001 Line 7 9 1920x1080 25P Line 7 10 1920x1080 24P Line 7 11 1920x1080 24PsF Line 7 12 1920x1080 24P 1 001 Line 7 13 1920x1080 24PsF 1 001 Line 7 14 1280x720 60P Line 7 15 1280x720 60P 1 001 Line 7 16 1280x720 50P Line 7 17 1280x720 30P Line 7 18 1280x720 30P 1 001 Line 7 19 1280x720 25P Line 7 20 1280x720 24P Line 7 21 1280x720 24P 1 001 Line 7 22 720x483 60P Line 10 23 720x576 50P Line 6 24 720x483 60P 1 001 Line 10 25 1920x1080 60P Line 7 26 1920x1080 60P 1 001 Line 7 27 1920x1080 50P Line 7 The following reference types are supported but need to be manually configured since they are not automatically detected becaus
29. Sync Type Selects which physical sync e Synci port the module uses as a e Sync2 reference e Sync3 e Sync4 Out Video Standard 1 8 Sets video standard e NTSC Table Parameter e PAL B D G H I e PAL N Chrominance Filter Type 1 8 Sets chrominance filter type e 1 3 MHz Table Parameter e 0 65 MHz e 1MHz e 2MHz e Reserved e CIF e QCIF e 3 MHz Luminance Filter Type 1 8 Table Parameter Enables or disables luminance filter type e NTSC low pass e PAL low pass e NTSC notch e PAL notch e Extended 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 233 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Analog Composite Video Modules Table Parameter level Parameter Description Options e CIF e QCIF e Reserved Pedestal Enable 1 8 Enables 7 5 IRE video setup e Enable Table Parameter level e Disable DNR 1 8 Enables or disables digital e Enable Table Parameter noise reduction e Disable Brightness 1 8 Sets brightness level 7 to 22 Table Parameter Contrast 1 8 Sets contrast level 0 192 Table Parameter Chrominance Saturation 1 8 Sets chrominance saturation 0 1255 Lock Detect 1 8 Table Parameter Reports presence or absence of valid signal e Signal absent e Signal present Mute 1 8 Table Parameter e On e Off Parameters and Faults View Parameters Faults 4 PT
30. and CRC HD detection and insertion e Simple test signal generator e Audio De embedder 4 groups 4 mono channels per group e Audio Sample Rate Conversion SRC after de embedding e Audio delay e Audio test tone generator e Audio ProcAmp gain mute invert sum and swap Frame Sync Features In addition modules with the Frame Sync license have these features e Video frame synchronizer and delay e Audio embedder with append or overwrite mode e Audio synchronizer Modules with the Frame Sync license installed operate in the following modes e Framesync mode SDI channels are genlocked to a common reference source which can be either NTSC PAL or TriLevel Your video reference has to be the same frame rate as your input The input channels can be asynchronous to each other 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 111 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer Demultiplexer Modules e Delay mode SDI channels will be processed in their recovered input clock domain In Delay mode some restrictions apply to the processing of Audio data e Mixed operation Some channels run in Framesync mode while others run in Delay mode Figure 53 PT FSDMXO IBG Module Power Up sequence Due to the complexity of the board and its parameter list it takes about 2 5 minutes after power cycling a board before it is fully operational About 30 se
31. data or SMPTE 12M Timecode LTC VITC for instance will be dropped or repeated together with the active video content every time the Frame Synchronizer drops or repeats a frame e VANC HANC data for Delay mode channels including embedded Audio is passed through the delay memory unprocessed Ancillary data remains untouched The absolute delay from In to Out can be changed arbitrarily within the predefined limits e g from Zus up to 16 frames 3us e SMPTE 372M Dual Link formats supported with 16 mono channels of Audio processed Processed Video Audio data exits the board as a single 3Gb s stream e Non PCM Audio data Dolby E or Dolby D is not processed by the Audio Synchronizer Audio Delay Audio ProcAmp processing blocks If it originated from embedded audio it is passed alongside the active video content through the Video Frame Synchronizer memory and a frame s worth of non PCM data is dropped or repeated together with the active video content every time the Video Frame Synchronizer drops or repeats a frame Quiet Audio Switching Switching between two sources of the same data and frame rate in the serial domain e g on a router s crosspoint board can cause momentary discontinuities in the SDI stream It doesn t matter whether the two sources are asynchronous or not a temporary glitch in the resulting SDI stream can cause downstream equipment to generate an erroneous output The Output module can absorb such glitch
32. manufacturing facility The module is replaceable however all control and communication with the frame will be lost when it is replaced If you need to upgrade or replace this module please contact our Customer Service Department 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 50 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Alarm Expansion Module PX ALARM Alarm Expansion Module PX ALARM PX ALARM Overview The Alarm Expansion module PX ALARM controls and monitors the Front and Rear Fan modules and monitors the GPI Inputs and Power Supplies Additionally the PX ALARM has Densishield connectors for Audio matrix expansion to connect to a second IP3 frame The PX ALARM module reports the status of the Fans Tachometer reading Internal and External Power Supply Alarms and GPI Inputs to the IP3 Controller via the Resource Module PX RES and to LEDs and possibly to GPI Outputs on the PX ALARM back of the Platinum IP3 frame The PX ALARM can control four GPI Outputs The module is located to the mid left of the Platinum IP3 frame and is accessible from the rear of the frame The module is hot swappable but when unplugged from the frame the Front and Rear Fans speed will increase to 10096 The PX ALARM controls the speed of the fans based on power supply loading FAIL SAFE A FOUT 1 3 c TOP Ae z UL BOT XPT 12 3 4 4 23 LEO GPI FAIL SAFE
33. muting of audio outputs e Yes when the V bit is set Muting on a detected V Bit applies to PCM audio channels only Non PCM audio channels will not be muted Sample Rate Conversion Engages or disengages RW e Auto 8x 8 the sample rate e Enable TABLE PARAMETER converter Bypass Tones 8 x 16 Selects the tone level for RW e Off TABLE PARAMETER the specified audio e 400 Hz channel A Ks e 2KHz e 4 KHz Level Adjust 8 x 16 Adjusts the audio level RW 18 dB 18 dB 0 in TABLE PARAMETER gain for each 0 1 dB steps audio channel Polarity Reversal 8 x 16 Specifies whether the RW e No TABLE PARAMETER audio channel should be e Yes inverted Audio Mute 8 x 16 Enables muting for the RW e Off TABLE PARAMETER specified output channel e On Summing 8 x 8 Specifies whether to RW e None TABLE PARAMETER sum the audio within a e Right to left ES e Left to right Left to Right the e Both summed audio is placed in the right channel 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 123 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer Demultiplexer Modules Name Description Type Options Right to Left the summed audio is placed in the left channel Both the summed audio is placed in both left and right channels Swap Copy 8 x 8 Specifies whether t
34. 135 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer Demultiplexer Modules In this mode SDI channels are processed audio muxing operations are supported regardless of whether the channel is locked to the Reference signal Locked SDI channels e Frame Sync Mux Status menu reports locked channels as Mux Locked e CHANNEL STATUS LED associated with the SDI channel at the front card edge will be lit green Unlocked SDI channels e Frame Sync Mux Status menu reports unlocked channels as Mux Unlocked e CHANNEL STATUS LED associated with the SDI channel at the front card edge will be lit Red Bypass Mode e SDI channels bypass all processing stages e No Audio muxing takes place when operating a channel in Bypass mode e Frame Sync Mux Status menu reports channels operating in Bypass mode as Bypass Frame Sync Mode Frame Sync is a licensable option If you do not have the Frame Sync license this feature will not be available To acquire a Frame Sync license contact your Customer Service representative A license can be added for the module using the License Key parameter Frame Sync mode is required if the incoming SDI data is asynchronous to the reference signal applied to the board With Frame Sync PT FSOB OPT installed incoming SDI data does not need to have a common data rate to be processed muxing audio back into SDI streams A mix of SD HD 3G 3G DL is supported for channels with the
35. 2 97Gb s 0 3UI reclocked Optical Output Power 2 dBm based on OP SFP TT 13 13 Optical Output Extinction Ratio 7 dB based on OP SFP TT 13 13 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 100 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Output Modules PX OB Capacity Table 49 PX OB Output Module Capacity Number of Inputs From rear edge of module 8 optional DensiShield inputs From MI connector 32 16 main 16 redundant Number of Outputs To rear edge of module 16 16 single ended or 16 differential or 8 single ended 8 differential Control Requirements All settings for the output circuitry are reset to the Output slot s configuration on module insertion Settings follow module location not modules themselves This way modules can be moved from slot to slot without the need to reconfigure the parameters Applications Integration The CCS Control System supports each Output module via the Navigator architecture with the router module installed and is available for control and monitoring from any Imagine Communications or SNMP supported control application 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 101 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Digital Video Modules Digital Video Modules Overview Digital Video Modules The following D
36. 222 ei Ee le E 223 Power CONSUMPTION wre 4o gereest rune dudes 224 Analog Composite Video EH 225 Analog Video to SDI Decoder Input Modules PT DEC IB ccc sccccssssssecsssseeecsesaeeecseaeeeessaeeeeeeaaes 225 Operati M T P EETA 225 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 9 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Contents lg AI OM ERR 227 CONTON gesiess H H 227 Controllable Parameters erect e ect eee EAEEEEE ANNER 227 Functional Block DIagratm 2 ot e eee tes Hox e devo esa egen de ees 230 ele TH ie EE 230 POWEF CONSUMPTION e 231 SD to Analog Video Encoder Modules DTENCORL eee eennn nn ennnnn nnne nn nnns nnns nan 231 Operatio Meer UL DEM EN 231 InstallatiOFim six tera terceros A A E oed E e at bebes eere Ped A 232 Sete M cose 233 Controllable Parameters ceccccesssseceeseeeceeseececeeseeeececseeeeceeseeeecseseeeecseeeecseeeeeecseseeeecseeeeaeeseseeaeess 233 Functional Block Diasgram eene nnne enne nenn nnn nns n enne tri asas snis se snas EKENS nnn 235 e ETH le EE 235 Power CONSUMPTION i 24 cc 236 Outp t Monitoring VIOOB SS ed ER EeAEe 237 PX HSRAEC OM Output Monitoring Module esses eene nennen nnn nnne nnne nnn nnns nnn 237 le EE 237 PX HSRAEC OM Configuration 2 toot utate ede ea sectetut asa eue ea
37. 256 mono channels but a maximum of 128 mono channels can be mapped to the TDM stream All inputs are converted to a common 48kHz sample rate prior to merging 128 mono channels into a single TDM stream Figure 74 PT MADI40 IBG Input Module 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 167 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Multichannel Audio Digital Interface MADI Modules Variants Electrical Back Module The electrical back module is an active back module attached to the front module with two brackets and with Cable Equalizers The back module has four BNC connectors and stays attached to the front module when pulling the module from the frame The back module is fully MADI compliant in terms of its electrical characteristics MADI IN 1 MADI IN 2 MADI IN 3 MADI IN 4 IN 5 8 UNUSED Figure 75 PT MADI4C IBG electrical back module Optical Back Module The optical back module hosts the cages for up to four Dual Rx Small Form factor Pluggable SFP Fiber Optic Receivers In connection with the PT MADI IBG front module only two of the four cages will be used The back module has to be mounted onto the frame and the Front Module detaches from the Back Module when the Front Module is pulled out from the frame One Dual Rx SFP module is pre installed The SFP module complies with the AES10 2008 requirements for optical interfaces See PT MADIAO IBG Specifications on p
38. 29 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 125 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer Demultiplexer Modules Name Description Type Options 1080i 59 e 0 000 us to 14 823 us 1080p 59 1080p 59 94 DL e 0 000 us to 35 542 us 1080p 25 1080i 50 e 0 000 us to 17 771 us 1080p 50 1080p 50 DL e 0 000 us to 37 024 us 1080p 24 1080sF 24 e 0 000 us to 37 061 us 1080p 23 98 1080sF 23 98 e 0 000 us to 31 987 us 1080i 50 295 e 0 000 us to 22 209 us 720p 60 e 0 000 us to 22 231 us 720p 59 94 e 0 000 us to 26 653 us 720p 50 e 0 000 us to 44 431 us 720p 30 e 0 000 us to 44 475 us 720p 29 e 0 000 us to 53 320 us 720p 25 e 0 000 us to 63 518 us 525i 59 94 e 0 000 us to 63 963 us 625i 50 Vertical Phase x 8 Adjusts the vertical timing Note The usable range depends on the video standard e 0 1124 lines 1080p I sF e 0 1249 lines 1080i 50 SMPTE 295M e 0 749 lines 720p e 0 524 lines 525i 59 94 e 0 624 lines 625i 50 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 126 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer Demultiplexer Modules Name Description Type Options Frame Offset x 8
39. 2RX Unknown No SFP MADI Output Module PT MADIAX OBG The PT MADIAC OBG PT MADI40 OBG output module is an AES10 2008 MADI compliant audio output board that supports two MADI formats 56 and 64 channels Audio data is encapsulated into the MADI transport stream at a sample rate of 48kHz and typically locked to the same Reference as the TDM Receiver The PT MADI4X OBG output module can encode up to128 TDM audio channels into up to 4 MADI outputs with each output capable of up to 64 channels each or 32 AES stereo pairs of PCM Audio or non PCM data such as Dolby E or Dolby D 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 178 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Multichannel Audio Digital Interface MADI Modules Variants Electrical Back Module The PT MADI4C OBG output module has a built in electrical back module that provides 4 BNC connectors there are a total of 8 connectors but the last 4 are unused and covered MADI OUT1 MAD OUT 2 MADI OUT3 MADI OUT 4 OUT 5 8 UNUSED Optical Back Module The PT MADI40 OBG Optical Multi mode Fiber SFP Back Module is same one used for the MADI Optical Input Module break away tabs determine if the back module is to be used as input or output The Back Module hosts the cages for up to four Dual Rx Small Form factor Pluggable SFP Fiber Optic Modules Rx or Tx Only two of the four cages will be use
40. 43 13B 36 1B 28 5B 21 9B 28 13B 21 1B Gnd 42 5B Gnd 35 9B Gnd 42 13B Gnd 35 2A 14 6A 6 10A 14 14A 6 2A 13 6A 5 10A 13 14A 5 2A Gnd 29 6B 34 10A Gnd 29 14B 34 2B 41 6B 19 10B 41 14B 19 2B 26 6B 7A 20 10B 26 14B 15A 20 Gnd Gnd 2B Gnd 40 7A 4 10B Gnd 40 15A 4 3A 12 7A 3 11A 12 15A 3 3A 11 7B 32 11A 11 15B 32 3A Gnd 27 7B 17 11A Gnd 27 15B 17 3B 24 7B Gnd 33 11B 24 15B Gnd 33 3B 39 8A 1 11B 39 16A 1 3B 4A 25 8A 2 11B 12A 25 16A 2 Gnd Gnd 4A 10 8A 8B 18 12A 10 16A 16B 18 Gnd Gnd 4A 9 8B 31 12A 9 16B 31 4B 23 8B 16 12B 23 16B 16 4B 38 12B 38 4B Gnd 37 12B Gnd 37 Specifications Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice Note Unless otherwise noted all specifications are measured using a 48 kHz sampling rate 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 197 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Analog Digital Audio Converter Modules with TDM Item Specification Number of inputs 16 Input type Balanced Input connector DB 44 Impedance gt 20kQ Signal type Stereo analog audio Maximum input amplitude 28 dBu Full scale adjustment range O dBFS 13 dBu to 28 dBu in 1 dB steps 0 5 dB CMRR 75dB rejection 0 60Hz Conversion type 128x oversampling 1 bit delta sigma Resolution 24 bits Sampling rates 32 kHz 192
41. 73 SYNC References deret etui nte etu orae tege erregt one cades 74 PX ATDM64 X28 Block Diagratri cete Eee e ee Heute inue d e LONE eret ena 74 Functionality EE 74 LED lee et TC 76 PX ATDM64 X28 Pbarameters been 77 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 5 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Contents Firmware Upgrade tetti dee ae aaa eea ea eee aaee a e ee Ere anc Ree acido a sone du n 78 Power CONSUMPTION RE ERE E TL 79 Input Modules PX TE 80 PX IB Input Module General Overvleuw 80 PX IB INPUT OPTIONS ERR 80 PXB EXPANSION E 81 Inserting Input Modules into the Platinum Ip3frame ennemi 81 FailSate uen E H 81 Signal Hee andi LEDS EE 82 Module LEDS EE 82 e CHEN RE ER Controllable Parameters ciicicccsssscccsaseveesetavstelanevdeenensduetceaseveetesavueedaastveaceunvuecsaasvveesesaveiesaguvdesaensdviteaaneses 83 Parameter ec m 84 Module Root Level Parameters esses ener nennen nnne nnns enti arsi enti danse n nada ss ss na danses na das 84 Input ET 85 Advanced Rei 89 Specification itr 90 RE et Ee ke le TEE 90 Capacity EE 90 COME ege Aere ees eege N A T O A E Aer EN Control Regulretmieh EE 91 Applications IntegratiOn eterne seam ERENNERT 91 Block RTE 92 Output Modules PX OB dccusrcscensedoencnnnrbneeniebbntennibbneenibbbetonnbibh ben ibbbibonnbiebnemni
42. Confidential February 2015 Page 104 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Digital Video Modules Power Consumption Table 52 PX HSR9C1D IBG Power Consumption 24V Power Rail 13W 5V Power Rail 0 43W Total Power 13 43W PX HSR9O1D IBG Input Module The PX HSR9O1D IBG is a 9 channel SD HD 3G Digital Video Input Module with 5 SFP connectors olo olo olo oo oe IN 1 2 IN 3 4 IN 5 6 Figure 45 PX HSR901D IBG The PX HSR9O IBG has 5 dual channel SFP modules mounted on the metal back panel of the back module each containing two channels The first channel of the last connector is not currently used The receivers accept fiber optical signals within wavelength range of X nm X nm Via the DensiShield port inputs received can be output routed to another module in the same frame or another frame The Back Module interfaces with the PX IB Input module to accept 9 optical inputs See Input Modules PX IB on page 80 for details on the PX IB Input module Power Consumption Table 53 PX HSR901D IBG Power Consumption 24V Power Rail 16 3W 5V Power Rail 0 43W Total Power 16 73W 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 105 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Digital Video Modules PX HSR16C OBG Output Module The PX HSR16C OBG is a 16 channel SD HD 3G Digital Video Output Module with 16 HDBNC connectors
43. Design Spec Power Supply P N I d in Current Current PMen atune Wire Color signa 27 35A 31A 24B Green 24V Return 28 35A N A AC Safety Ground Green AC Ground Figure 120 Connector Pin Numbering Power Distribution Modules Power Distribution Modules are the interface between PX PS Power Supplies in the PX FR 28 frame and the PX FR EXPS Power Distribution Modules are connected to the PX BP 28 MI backplane eliminating the need for the separate connectors and wiring Top Power Distribution Module PX PD TOP The Top Power Distribution Module PX PD TOP is used both in the PX FR 28 IP3 frame and in the PX FR EXPS External Power Supply Frame d EE Y j Figure 121 PX PD TOP Power Distribution Module shown with wires 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 261 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual 1500 Watt Power Supply and External Power Supply Frame DIP Switches on the PX PD TOP There are four DIP switches SW1 to SW4 on the PX PD TOP Top Power Distribution board CAUTION The DIP Switch must be in a specific position depending on whether the PX PD TOP is used in the IP3 frame or the PX FR EXPS External Power Supply Frame e When the PX PD TOP is used in the PX FR EXPS frame all switch positions should be set to CLOSED ON e When the PX PD TOP is used in the IP3 frame switch positions should be set to OPEN OFF
44. February 2015 Page 142 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer Demultiplexer Modules Firmware Upgrade and Backup Image The modules maintain a backup image of the last working firmware at all times In the event of an upgrade failure the module will revert back to its backup image to maintain operation on the board You can verify the version that is currently running on the module by looking at the version parameter Version MK20_App_S6_V6 See General Parameters on page 145 Upgrading the firmware on the modules takes approximately 30 minutes Multiple identical boards can be upgraded at once in batches of up to 16 boards one zone A batch upgrade takes about as long as upgrading a single board Always wait for the Firmware upgrade successful message before power cycling the system exchanging boards or carrying out any other maintenance work that could interfere with the upgrade process Do not interrupt the power supply or tamper with a board while an upgrade is in progress This could corrupt the firmware necessitating a restart of the upgrade process After a successful firmware upgrade the upgraded board s will automatically reboot and will start unpacking the newly installed firmware components This process can take up to 2 minutes and should not be interrupted In case the board is removed from the frame or a power outage happens whilst the board is preparing the newly
45. GPI Output Alarms The alarm module communicates directly tothe 4 see User Definable GPI Output resource module via the proprietary PIPE single Alarms on page 54 Outputs 1 4 wire serial interface This communication provides access to any status signal reported in the entire frame User Definable GPI Input Alarms Ability to monitor legacy equipment alarm failures 3 see User Definable GPI Input and report these failures through control software Alarms on page 54 Inputs 1 3 such as Navigator Fan Failure Alarm on page 54 Fan Module Fail 1 Power Supply Failure Alarm on page PS Fail 1 54 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 53 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Alarm Expansion Module PX ALARM User Definable GPI Output Alarms On user defined GPI outputs 1 through 4 the Resource Module PX RES communicates the status of any alarm conditions within the IP3 frame to the PX ALARM module to assert trigger the GPI Outputs When a GPI Output is asserted the corresponding GPO LED is lit on the PX ALARM module Parameters and Faults View Parameters Back To Parameters 4 PX ALARM DATA PX ALARM DATA Alarm Rear Fans ua 7 User Configurable Alarm No Figure 17 User Definable Alarms User Definable GPI Input Alarms User defined inputs 1 to 3 provide the ability to monitor legacy equipment alarm fa
46. HSRRCZDS ORG View Parameters Faults PX HSR8CZ2DS OBG PX HSR8C2DS OBG PX HSREC2DS OBG PX HSR8CZDS OBG Outputs PX HSR8C2DS OBGVOutp Back To Parameters Output PX HSR8C2DS OBG Advanced PX HSR8C2DS OBG S Lock Detect PX HSR8CZDS OBG No PXHERDIODS OBG Total number of pxcrsrecens oss PX HSRBC2DS OBG Px Hsrec s 86 modules in frame PX HSR6 amp CZDS OBG Reclocker Mode PX HSR8C2DS OBG Power Consumption Table 57 PX HSR8C2DS OBG Power Consumption 24V Power Rail 14 1W 5V Power Rail 0 43W Total Power 14 53W 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 109 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer Demultiplexer Modules Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer Demultiplexer Modules Overview The following Frame Synchronizer Demux Input Modules are available Table 58 Frame Synchronizer Demux Input Modules Module Description PT FSDMX IBG 8 Channel Frame Synchronizer and Demux Input Module with BNC connectors See PT FSDMX IBG PT FSDMXO IBG Frame Synchronizer and Demultiplexing Input Modules on page 111 PT FSDMXO IBG 8 Channel Frame Synchronizer and Demux Input Module with SFP connectors See PT FSDMX IBG PT FSDMXO IBG Frame Synchronizer and Demultiplexing Input Modules on page 111 PT FSDX8C1D IBG 8 Channel Matrix Expansion Frame Sync Input Module See PT FSDX8C1D IBG Frame Sync In
47. Modules If you insert Group 2 audio when there is pre existing Group 1 audio in the ancillary data space and no Group 2 audio the Group 2 audio will be inserted following the Group 1 audio ADS before embedding ADS after embedding group 2 GROUP 1 GROUP 2 Figure 66 Append Embedding Mode Adding Group 2 Following Group 1 If you insert Group 1 audio when there is pre existing Group 2 audio in the ancillary data space and no Group 1 audio the Group 1 audio will be inserted following the Group 2 audio ADS before embedding EAV GROUP 2 ADS after embedding group 1 EAV GROUP 2 GROUP 1 Figure 67 Append Embedding Mode Adding Group 2 Following Group 1 An audio group cannot be divided In Append embedding the audio group is always added following the last block in the ADS If there is not enough room to append the audio group following the last block of auxiliary data or audio in the ADS no audio will be embedded ADS before embedding LI didis daa ADS after attempting to embed group 1 Omer omer omer EAV auxiliary auxiliary auxiliary Result No audio is appended Figure 68 Append Embedding Mode Fails to Append When Auxiliary Data Exists in all Audio Groups 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 161 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer Demultiplexer Modules OverWrite Embedding When you select Overwrite embeddi
48. Power Consumption 24V Power Rail 14W 5V Power Rail 0 43W Total Power 14 43W PX HSR9C IBG PX HSR9O IBG Parametric Control The PX HSR9C IBG PX HSR9O IBG Module can be controlled via the Controller When you access a PX HSR9C IBG PX HSR9O IBG module by clicking on it in the list of Input Modules its parameters are displayed The total number of PX HSR9C IBG 90 modules in the frame is also displayed on the left PX HSR9C IBG Mo s Cx Close PX HSROC IBG Modules Parameters and Faults PX HSR9C IBG View Parameters Faults PX HSR9C IBG PX HSR9C IBG 4 PX HSR9C IBG HOHE Sale Hem PX HSR9C IBG Inputs CRC amp EDH PX HSR9C IBG Advanced PX HSR9C IBG 0 CRC EDH Error Fields PX HSR9C IBG o exec lOtal number of o a vu renne PX HSR9C IBG SS Enable PX HsRSCIBG modules in frame PX HSRSC IBG PX HSR9C1D IBG Input Module The PX HSR9C1D IBG is a 9 channel SD HD 3G Digital Video Input Module with 9 HDBNC connectors and one DensiShield port for expansion n eg eg f Y E CN WM Kl bei we Ww WE e M OUT 1 8 N2 IN3 IN4 IN5 IN6 Figure 44 PX HSR9C1D IBG Via the DensiShield port inputs received can be routed to another module in the same frame or another frame This Back Module interfaces with the PX IB Input module to accept 9 electrical inputs See Input Modules PX IB on page 80 for details on the PX IB Input module 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and
49. Received data Ta Tx 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential Resource Module PX RES February 2015 Page 46 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Resource Module PX RES Pin Signal Tributary Description aan CE 3 Rb Rx twisted pair Tb Tx 4 Rc Transmitted data Transmitted data shield shield 9 FG Frame ground Frame ground 5 SP Not connected Not connected Resource Card Synchronization In normal operating mode all parameter and route changes are synchronized from the Active Master PX RES to the Standby PX RES When upgrading PX RES firmware images are also synchronized If the alternate firmware image is activated on the active PX RES the alternate image on the standby PX RES also becomes active If there is only a single PX RES in the frame the PX RES Synchronization parameter is set to Yes and disabled grayed out If a new PX RES is inserted into the spare slot the active PX RES transfers all its content to the new standby PX RES and the PX RES Synchronization parameter is then enabled If the PX RES Synchronization parameter is set to No all the synchronization stops Routes and parameter information of the standby PX RES will remain as is Active and Standby Determination e Active and Standby states are non volatile e An active PX RES remains active after a power cycle e The standby PX RES only becomes activ
50. Sync Sync Mode as Frame Sync Ext Lock e Reference present and locked different frame rate for SDI channel When a Reference is present and locked but the SDI channel s field or frame rate doesn t match the rate of the Reference signal The channel will be automatically forced into Delay mode The Frame Sync Mux Status menu will report channels set to Frame Sync Sync Mode as Frame Sync Delay Rate Mismatch Frame Sync Delay Mode Note In Delay mode only a restricted set of processing features can be applied to an SDI channel When operating the Frame Sync in Delay mode the audio embedders are automatically turned off Any ancillary data will be passed unprocessed aside from any video delay If the input video frame rate does not match the genlock frame rate for a channel that channel is automatically placed into Delay Mode This information is reflected in the Frame Sync Status parameter e An SDI channel can be forced into Delay mode operation by setting it to Frame Sync Delay Mode e Channels set to Frame Sync Delay Mode will be reported as Frame Sync Delay Forced by the Frame Sync Mux Status menu Bypass Mode In Bypass mode the SDI channel will bypass all processing stages e No Framesync operation and no Audio muxing takes place when operating a channel in Bypass mode e The Frame Sync Mux Status menu reports channel forced to operate in Bypass mode as Bypass PX HSRMX OBG Features Key processi
51. Table Show Table Figure 93 PT AEST IB Parameters 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 213 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Functional Block Diagram AES input 1 AES input 2 AES input 3 AES input 4 AES input 5 AES input 6 AES input 7 AES input 8 AES input 9 AES input 10 AES input 11 AES input 12 AES input 13 AES input14 AES input 15 AES input 16 FPGA based signal presence detection and internal distribution 24VA in from frame 5V 24VB in On board 3 3V from frame supply 2 5V 5VL in 1 2V from frame gt AES Balanced Coaxial Modules with TDM Capability First 8 inputs distributed to crosspoint matrix EL All 16 inputs distributed to TDM matrix 9 x 3 TDM output Internal control bus Card status and signal presence Ens PIPE Back module Control logic S ID signals gt RTI Figure 94 PM AEBT IB PT AEBT IB PM AECT IB PT AECT IB Functional Block Diagram Pinout Diagram Table 97 PM AEBT IB PT AEBT IB Pinout Information J2 Inputs 1 8 ae J1 Inputs 9 16 aa 1 13 9 13 1 12 9 12 1 Gnd 25 9 Gnd 25 2 24 10 24 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 214 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual AES Balanced Coaxial Modul
52. Watt Power Supply and External Power Supply Frame 2 Connect all four connectors A B C D on the PX FR EXPS to the corresponding connectors A B C D on the PX FR 28 Figure 112 PX FR EXPS unit mounted above PX FR 28 3 Attach the Interface DC power cables between the PX FR 28 and PX FR EXPS Figure 113 DC Power Cables connected between PX FR 28 and PX FR EXPS 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 254 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual 1500 Watt Power Supply and External Power Supply Frame 4 Secure the DC power cables to the mating Combination D Sub connector by tightening the screws Figure 114 Locking Screws to secure DC Power Cables connected to PX FR 28 The following figure shows the 90 DC power cables attached to the bottom of the PX FR 28 frame Figure 115 Bottom of PX FR 28 with 90 DC Cables attached 5 Mount the second PX FR EXPS below the PX FR 28 frame 6 Repeat the above steps to connect the A B C D connectors on the bottom PX FR EXPS to the corresponding connectors on the frame bottom 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 255 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual 1500 Watt Power Supply and External Power Supply Frame Installing Power Supplies CAUTION The latch on the Power Supply PX PS must be in the unlocked position latch on the right side of the slot bef
53. Yes temperature alarm on this No board Software Version Software version of micro RO String controller FPGA Version Version of FPGA RO String 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 66 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Video Crosspoint Module PX 576x1024 3G LED Indicators on Video Crosspoint Module The following system indicator LEDs are present on the front edge of the PX 576x1024 3G module Table 29 Module System LEDs LED DESCRIPTION POWER Power Supply indicator Green When lit this indicates that 24V is enabled on this board ACT CTRL Active Control Red Initializing Solid Green FPGA has configured and the Resource Module PX RES is communicating with the card Flashing Alarm condition on the card Green ACT XPT Active Crosspoint Yellow When lit this indicates that this is the Main Crosspoint Zou IQ sw_ S 16 04 Figure 25 LEDs on the PX 576x1024 3G Video Crosspoint Module Note These LEDs are not directly visible on the Video Crosspoint when it is in normal operation since the Front Fan module is in front of the Video Crosspoint The ACT XPT Active Crosspoint LED on the Front Fan module indicates which Video Crosspoint is the Active Primary Crosspoint The ACT XPT LED will be off on the Front Fan module in front of the Redundant Crosspoint 2015 Imagine Commun
54. a single flexible 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 18 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Introduction frame The IP3 can switch signals from 3 Mb s to 3Gb It can pass and reclock both standard SD including 143 177 270 360 and 540 Mb s HD 1 485 Gb s and SDI 3G signals supporting routing of both SD and HD signals in the same router The Platinum wideband video and TDM audio switching fabrics which allow for non blocking audio processing have been retained and a third fabric for IP routing has been added This switch supports faster module upgrades faster control communication and a packetized data switching infrastructure to facilitate metadata and hybrid switching and internal streaming To support audio matrix expansion between two IP3 frames the internal Audio Time Division Multiplexed TDM buses are Time division multiplexed onto a higher speed TDM bus operating at 3 Gbits s each and carried over 16 DensiShield channels This requires a minimum of two DensiShield cables one for outputs distribution and a second for input distribution or four cables if redundancy is desired With the Platinum IP3 s Audio Expansion option a two frame system is fully non blocking meaning that audio inputs embedded or discrete in frame one can be routed to any output in frame two Removing the Frame Door Note While you can just open the front door of the Frame you
55. additional inputs to the matrix When inserted into the Platinum IP3 frame each Input Module mates with a passive connector assembly back module mounted in the rear of the frame This assembly allows a high integrity interconnect between the input cables and the input module without requiring any active components Frames that are not fully populated with input modules when shipped from the factory contain blank covers over the non populated slots If an Input Module is added to the frame at a future time the blank cover must be replaced with the corresponding back module Failsafe Mode To put an Input Module in Failsafe Mode 1 Unplug the board 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 81 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Input Modules PX IB 2 Set the Failsafe jumper 3 Wait 10 seconds 4 Insert the board again The above procedure applies to the following Input Modules e PX HSR9C IBG Input Module on page 103 e PX HSR9O IBG Input Module on page 103 e PX HSR9C1D IBG Input Module on page 104 e PX HSR901D IBG Input Module on page 105 Signal Presence and LEDs Each of the nine input channels on the Input Module provides signal presence reporting via card edge LEDs and the control software Both have the ability to be disabled or enabled through the control software along with a user selectable hysteresis period Module LEDs See Module LEDs on pa
56. band decimation filter is applied right after the digital conversion to reduce the data rate to 1X the pixel rate which effectively adds up to 3dB to the overall signal to noise ratio SNR Although sampled at a component data rate the digitized composite signal is band pass filtered into separate luminance and chrominance channels Y C The chrominance channel is sent through a quadrature demodulator for further separation into the base component color difference channels R Y B Y As the color demodulation process is likely to cause artifacts in the video the R Y and B Y signals are sent through low pass filters to reduce those artifacts and achieve optimum bandwidth and through a five line adaptive comb filter to compare possible color phase shift issues from line to line As the next step in the color demodulation process a color space converter is used to convert the red and blue color components to U and V color difference components Cr Cb as needed for ITU R 601i and SMPTE 125M type signals The RGB to YUV color space conversion is defined in the following system of equations e Y 0 299R 0 587G 0 114B e U 0 172R 0 339G 0 511B 512 e V 0 511R 0 428G 0 083B 512 In cases where the U V bandwidth needs to be limited as to prevent aliasing or chrominance crosstalk a set of user adjustable notch filters is provided Although more of an issue in the companion encoder digital to analog DAC cards careful atte
57. channels allocated on the TDM bus for the MADI signal e All channels with input signal are passed Sample MADI to TDM Mapping Scenarios The following are mapping use cases with different MADI configurations such 32 channel 56 channel or 64 channel e Four 32 channel MADI Inputs all channels mapped on page 171 e Four 64 channel MADI Inputs 1 and 3 mapped on page 172 e Combination 32 56 channel MADI Inputs 3 and 4 mapped on page 172 Four 32 channel MADI Inputs all channels mapped This example depicts 4 MADI inputs with 32 channel inputs each Since a total of 128 channels mappings are allowed all four inputs can be mapped to the TDM Back To Parameters Mapping PT MADI4C IBG Mapping MADI to TDM map 1 MADI OTDM mapi 32 MADI to TDM map MADI to TDM map 2 MA TDM map 3 MADI to TDM map 4 In the Controller UI e Open up the MADI Input Module e Goto Mapping in the navigation tree e Set all four MADI to TDM maps to 32 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 171 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Multichannel Audio Digital Interface MADI Modules Four 64 channel MADI Inputs 1 and 3 mapped In this example all MADI inputs are 64 channel Since a total of 128 channels mappings are allowed a maximum of two inputs can be mapped to the TDM Inputs from MADI 1 and 3 have been selected for mapping Back To Parameters Mapping
58. connectors at the outside edge of the module 4 inputs and 4 outputs Table 109 Video Connectors Note The Audio connectors though present are not currently used or functional The module can be used in three different ways e The PX HSRAEC OM can receive a copy of the signal being sent to a particular router output e The PX HSRAEC OM can monitor any of the router inputs in the frame e The PX HSRAEC OM can also be used in an external routing mode where a physical cable is connected from the PX HSRAEC OM input port to an external source destination or other test equipment Notes e PX HSRAEC OM modules have 2 monitor ports per slot Slot 6 has video OUT1 OUT2 Slot 7 has Video OUT3 OUTA e Each PX HSRAEC OM module can only monitor one output at a time from an output card on the same router 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 237 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Output Monitoring Modules PX HSRAEC OM Configuration The PX HSRAEC OM is configured via the IP3 Database Editor in the Magellan CCS Navigator UI The following is an example that describes how to 1 Configure Output Monitoring Destinations See Add PX HSRAEC OM Destinations on page 238 2 Add Output Monitoring External Sources Inputs See Add PX HSRAEC OM External Sources Inputs on page 239 3 Add Router Destinations for monitoring See Add Monitoring Router Destinations on page
59. iea aenda 238 SPECICATION S eee ER 243 Controllable Parameters roter re reet er cen tee ei nere nv eed nea C eve ev EAS Aiae siaaa 244 Parameters geesde edd ERE e ex Eu ke Ee SEE EE EE nex EE X REY Ee ERE E e EVE 244 1500 Watt Power Supply and External Power Supply Frame 246 Power Supplies OvervieW ssssssssissssssssesrrssssssrrerrrssssssrrernnssssssrrernnsssstsrrennnsasstnrretnnsssstnrneennssnsennnetnnenno 246 Power Distribution ZONES EE RE 246 Ne Tele EE 248 Power Supplies PX PS ee hea tect eite etse tes eeo ek Ene EE sedate cuna ens 250 PowerSupply MOodes ote ev toe v e ede bee uve b IV e 250 POWER SUDDIY LEDS M EN 250 External Power Supply Frame DNX ER EXDS 251 iz De Be en E EE 252 e el UE 252 Power Cable Installation Steps 253 Installing Power Supplies edic etes eege EENEG 256 Power Supplies in BER Reide Edge ronde pn pode en scbdeddosnccedebyoncedebyadceddbsondeddbSuecedebvodcensvsaded 256 Power Supplies in PX FR EXPS 2 2 2 2 a rise cknr ince cka p poco aea saaccedsyatecdevyboadedepacdedenvooddedsvabecdevvbdedeaspatee 256 Installation InstFUCtlOns EE 256 Power Supply Specs LEDs and Pinouts essen nennen enne nnne nnn nn isses nnne nnns sanas 258 Power Supply Mechanical Spechfication 258 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 10 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Contents Power Supply Electric
60. indicator ACT OUT indicates that a valid input signal has been switched to an output on this module Back Panel I O Module for PT ENC OB The PT V BP back panel I O module corresponds to the module Output Monitoring Module The optional PT HSRAEC OM module provides output monitoring for the PT ENC OB Installation Output Module Installation All output modules are installed at our manufacturing facility If you need to purchase additional components please contact your dealer or our Sales Department 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 232 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Back Panel I O Module Installation Analog Composite Video Modules All back panel modules are installed at our manufacturing facility If you need to purchase additional components please contact your dealer or our Sales Department Output Monitoring Module Installation All output monitoring modules are installed at our manufacturing facility If you need to purchase additional components please contact your dealer or our Sales Department Control This Module s parameters can be enabled and or changed via CCS Navigator or the IP3 Controller Controllable Parameters Table 106 PT ENC OB User Controllable Parameters List Parameter Description Options Module Board Level Hysteresis Sets hysteresis for parameters 0 to 5 seconds in 500 ns steps needing it
61. installed above and one below the PX FR 28 90 Male to Male Combination D Sub 165 100037Q00 90 cables are a customer orderable option If 90 cables are used to connect the PX FR EXPS to the PX FR 28 frame both PX FR EXPS units can be installed above or below the PX FR 28 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 252 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual 1500 Watt Power Supply and External Power Supply Frame Power Cable Installation Steps CAUTION All AC power lines should be disconnected before attaching the Interface DC power cables to the rear of the frames Note the orientation of the Combination D Sub green connectors with gold contacts on the Rear panel see Figure One is rotated 180 degrees from the other Keep this in mind when attaching the Interface DC power cables EH 400 240 VAC 18 8A x4 pe or 50 60Hz CAUTION THES EQUIPMENT HAS MORE THAN ONE POWTER SUPPLY CORD TO AVOID ELECTRICAL SHOCK DISCONNECT ALL POWER SUPPLY CORDS BEFORE SERVICING MN Tono DE PR VENIR LES CHOCS LECTRIQUES D BRANCHER TOUS LES CORDONS U ALIMENTATION AVANT DE FAIRE LE D PANNAGE Figure 111 Rear View of the PX FR 28 frame showing the D Sub connectors 1 1Mount the PX FR EXPS above the PX FR 28 frame 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 253 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual 1500
62. installed firmware it will retry as soon as the board is plugged back into the frame or power is resumed LED Indicators LED Indicators on the board signal the following e Power Good e Power On Self Test Passed e Temperature Alarm e Communication Activity e SDI Signal Presence 8 LEDs 1 per output e Status LEDs for Status and Diagnostics Jumpers and DIP Switches This module has no user configurable jumpers The two DIP Switches labeled SW1 and SWC2 must remain in their factory set default positions OFF Failsafe Module Upgrade The Flash Memory can be partially or entirely upgraded through the PIPE interface In case of upgrade issues due to power failures or system instability during upgrade the last known good working version is automatically reverted to Power Consumption The maximum power consumption is 75 watts when all 16 fiber outputs are running at 3 Gb s 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 143 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Functional Block Diagram PT HSRMX OBG PX HSRMX OBG Data Flow firmware version 2 1 or higher Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer Demultiplexer Modules Processing FPGA one channel shown
63. kHz using external AES reference 32 kHz 44 1 kHz 48 kHz 88 2 kHz 96 kHz or 192 kHz using internal oscillators Gain stability t 0 01 dB Frequency response 0 15 dB 20 Hz to 20 kHz Linearity deviation lt 0 5 dB typical lt 1 0 dB worst case THD N lt 0 01 997 Hz 1 dBFS 23 dBu Idle channel noise 100 dBFS CCIR RMS typical 90 dBFS CCIR RMS worst case Dynamic range 100 dB CCIR RMS typical 90 dB CCIR RMS worst case Crosstalk 90 dB isolation 20 Hz to 20 kHz all hostile hostile channels driven at 1 dBFS 23 dBu Table 89 PT ADCT IB Analog to Digital Audio Input 600W Version Note Unless otherwise noted all specifications are measured using a 48 kHz sampling rate Item Specification Number of inputs 16 Input type Balanced Input connector DB 44 Impedance 600 Signal type Stereo analog audio 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 198 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Analog Digital Audio Converter Modules with TDM Item Specification Maximum input amplitude 22 dBm Full scale adjustment range 0 dBFS 7 dBm to 22 dBm in 1 dB steps 0 5 dB CMRR gt 60 dB rejection 60Hz Conversion type 128x oversampling 1 bit delta sigma Resolution 24 bits
64. laser status RO e Enabled Modules with SFPs only e Disabled e N A e Normal e Failed Reclocker Mode Sets the reclock mode to RW e Auto Default automatic or bypass or e 3G to one of three manual e HD fixed rates e SD e Bypass Data Rate Detects data rate RO e Unknown e SD e HD e 3G Sets automatic reclocker RW e Yes Default Autobypass bypass mode e No When set to Yes if incoming video is not locked in the reclocker the signal will be passed through as is When set to No if incoming video is not locked in the reclocker signal output from the reclocker will be invalid Lock Detect Reports if data is RO e Yes relocked by reclocking e No stage 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 98 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Output Modules PX OB Name Description Type Options Exp Reclocker Mode Sets the reclock mode RW e Auto Default Expansion Modules e 3G only e HD e SD e Bypass Expand Signal Present Reports signal presence RO e Yes Expansion Modules e No only Exp Auto Bypass Sets automatic reclocker RW e Yes Expansion Modules bypass mode e No only Exp Lock Detect Reports if data is RO e Yes Expansion Modules relocked by reclocking e No only stage Exp Data Rate Detects data rate RO e Unknown Expansion Modules e SD only e HD e 3G Advanced Parameters Advanced Para
65. lt String gt controller Control FPGA Version Version of FPGA RO lt String gt SFP Type Reports the type of SFP RO e Invalid SFP Table Parameter e OP SFP TT 13 13 e OP SFP TT 27 29 Modules with SFPs only e OP SFP TT 31 33 e OP SFP TT 35 37 e OP SFP TT 39 41 e OP SFP TT 43 45 e OP SFP TT 47 49 e OP SFP TT 51 53 e OP SFP TT 55 57 e OP SFP TT 59 61 e NO SFP Module Status Sync Select Selects which physical sync RW e 0 Default port the module uses as a e1 reference e2 e 3 Output Parameters Output Parameters are accessed by clicking the Output option below the Module in the parameter menu list Output parameters are grouped into a Table and can be accessed by clicking the Show Table button Outputs Show Table The following parameters are displayed 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 97 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Table 46 Output Modules Output Parameters Output Modules PX OB Name Description Type _ Options Enforced Slew Rate Sets output slew rate in RW e SD Default bypass mode e HD Mute Mutes individual board RW e Yes outputs e No Default Laser Enable Enables or disables fiber RW e Auto Modules with SFPs only optical output e Enable e Disable Wavelength Reports wavelength of RO e Modules with SFPs only fiber optical output Laser Status Reports
66. may want to remove it completely when you need better access to Modules While pressing in the chrome locking pin lift the door off the hinge and remove 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 19 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Introduction Figure 2 IP3 Frame and close up of locking pin 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 20 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Introduction Frame Architecture Platinum IP3 Front View Power Supplies Primary Video Crosspoint Inputs 1 144 Outputs 1 256 e ans MI Backplane Outputs 257 512 Inputs 145 288 Primary Data Switch Primary Redundant PT SYNC Primary Redundant Primary Redundan Audio TDM Crosspoint Resource Cards Outputs 513 768 Inputs 289 432 Redundant Data Switch Redundant Video Crosspoint Inputs 433 576 Figure 3 IP3 Frame viewed from the front 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 21 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Introduction Platinum IP3 Rear View Rear Fan Module AC DC Rear Panel Output Back Modules ER Communications Alarm and A Jul i Back Panel Expansion i i Empty Slot Rear Filler Plate Figure 4 IP3 Frame Rear View Note Rear Filler plates required to maintain proper airflow in the frame and for Electro Magnetic com
67. nnn iras enne teris E aE EER 205 Pino t Diagram uice cese Lora d ra Ede rele decoram aE rad Pe esae Ede ar Ee Seawiden rede Na en 206 Ke d Te die E 207 Ife T diSenitnsusme E 208 AES Balanced Coaxial Modules with TDM Capability eeeeeeeeee 209 AES Balanced Coaxial Input Modules with TDM Capability PT AEBT IB PT AECT IB 209 Op eratiOD RE Re En RR ER RE UD e e E 209 jack 211 Sed 211 Controllable Parameters 1 aiite iterat tei eie conari tena ei ek dde ENEE nace dao ka AES 211 Functional Block Diagrarn icc ecce cauce docte e aa Eee eed EACH R mate ORE e ER REIN CORE dca RES 214 Pinout Dia SPAIN DEE 214 Kin TECH ie EE 215 Power CONSUMPTION esc s eene eege Ee ees ee dee 216 AES Balanced Coaxial Output Modules with TDM Capability PT AEBT OB PT AECT OB 217 Soie EE 217 ick EE 218 gend 218 Controllable Parameters 1i trinitate thai tha te ka ede na ede tro haee pana eee daa ka ed o nd eee aoa 219 Functional Block Diagram occi o ctae adt ec tae nta aco do cte e cess HESE EES 221 Piriout DIagt abri oer sro Erbe e evt ade rie ter asbestos deccchanede cpetcees asc e ERU a d UU
68. of the Output Ch 1 16 Source Select parameters Table 60 Audio Test Tones Test Tone Frequency Test Tone 1 400 Hz Test Tone 2 1 kHz Test Tone 3 2 kHz Test Tone 4 4 kHz Group 1 4 Deembedding Control The following table describes options for the Group 1 4 Deembedding Control parameter Table 61 Deembedding Control Options Item Description Repeat Upon detection of a de embedding error the de embedder repeats the last good AES sample Mute Upon detection of a de embedding error the de embedder mutes the current outgoing AES sample Audio Embedding Modes See Appendix A Audio Embedding Video Frame Synchronization The frame synchronizer offers two modes of operation Delay mode and Synchronizer Sync mode These modes can be chosen using the Frame Sync Mode parameter e n Delay mode the output video is synchronized to the input video e n Sync mode the output video is synchronized to the reference video The reference standard you can use depends on the output video standard you have set as outlined in Table 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 114 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer Demultiplexer Modules Table 62 Supported Reference and Output Video Standard Combinations in Sync Mode rette Output Video Standard beanies Outpu
69. operation modes available depending on whether or not you have a Frame Sync license MUX only mode without Frame Sync license For proper audio muxing operation each SDI channel destined for Audio MUX must be locked to the Reference signal provided to the board While SDI channels can be of different data rates e g SD SDI HD HD 3G their field frame rates need to match those of the applied Reference In the Frame Sync Mux Mode menu the following modes of operation can be selected on a per SDI channel basis MUX Auto Detect Note MUX Auto Detect is the recommended operation mode for boards without a frame sync license This mode auto checks if SDI channels are locked to the Reference signal provided to the board Locked SDI channels e All supported Audio muxing operations are applicable e Frame Sync Mux Status menu reports locked channels as Mux Locked e CHANNEL STATUS LED associated with the SDI channel at the front card edge will be lit green Unlocked SDI channels e No Audio muxing will be performed and the channel will bypass all processing stages on the board e Frame Sync Mux Status menu reports unlocked channels as Bypass e CHANNEL STATUS LED at the front card edge associated with the SDI channel will be off MUX Always On Note For channels that are asynchronous to the Reference re embedded Audio will suffer disturbances 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page
70. or presence ofa e Absent signal on Channel A e Present Ch B Presence 1 16 Reports absence or presence ofa e Absent signal on Channel B e Present Phase Alarm 1 16 RO Alarm set if left and right channels are out of phase No phase error Phase error Clip Detect 1 32 RO Reports if signal on the input exceeds the maximum input amplitude Signal OK Signal clipping Polarity Reversal 1 32 Reverses and to correct audio polarity in the analog domain Normal polarity Invert polarity Tone Indicates type of tone to send out AES output Pass input Silence 500Hz 1K 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 194 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Analog Digital Audio Converter Modules with TDM Parameter Description Options Swap Copy 1 16 Swap Copy left and right audio channels NOTE This parameter is always applied after summing e No swap e Swap left and right e Copy left to right e Copy right to left Summing 1 16 Add left and right audio samples and then divide by 2 NOTE This parameter is always applied before swap copy e No summing e Right to left e Left to right e Both Parameters and Faults View Parameters Faults 4 PT ADCT IB Figure 84 PT ADCT Parameters 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Ext Ref Freq Unlocked Ext R
71. plugged into the wrong back modules or wrong slot Care should be exercised when plugging modules into the frame List of Supported Input and Output Modules Table 7 Platinum IP3 Input and Output Modules Functional Type Input Module Output Module Multichannel Audio PT MADI4C IBG PT MADI4C OBG Digital Interface MADI Electrical Input Module MADI Output Module with 4 Coaxial MADI Modules on Outputs 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 32 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Modules Functional Type Input Module Output Module page 166 PT MADI40 IBG MADI Optical Input Module PT MADI40 OBG MADI Output Module with 4 Optical Outputs Analog Digital Audio Converter Modules with TDM on page 189 PT ADCT IB TDM conversion Input Module 16 pairs to AES audio in TDM matrix first 8 copied to wideband matrix PT DACT OB 32 Mono Balanced Analog Audio Output Module 16 stereo pairs from TDM AES Balanced Coaxial Modules with TDM Capability PT AEBT IB 16 pairs with TDM Support balanced PT AEBT OB 16 AES Stereo Pair Digital Audio Output Module 16 stereo pairs from TDM balanced PT AECT IB 16 pairs with TDM Support coaxial PT AECT OB 16 AES Stereo Pair Digital Audio Output Module 16 stereo pairs from TDM coaxial Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer Demultip lexer Modules on page 11
72. same frame rate It is important to note that if the channel and the reference signal do not share a common frame rate inputs are processed in Delay mode no audio muxing In the Frame Sync Mux Mode menu the following operation modes can be selected on a per SDI channel basis Frame Sync Sync Mode An SDI channel qualifies for Frame Sync Sync Mode if its field or frame rate matches that of the Reference signal provided to the board e No Reference Frame Sync Sync Mode If no Reference is present but the operation mode is set to Frame Sync Sync Mode The outgoing signal will be locked to a local and fixed 27MHz high precision Reference The Frame Sync Mux Status menu will report channels set to Frame Sync Sync Mode as Frame Sync Local Lock e External Reference When an external Reference signal is applied to the frame e g 525 or 625 Black HD tri level Sync and the proper Reference Input has been selected for the board and the Reference is being detected as Present and Locked and the SDI channel s field or frame rate matches the rate of the Reference signal Video and embedded Audio data will be processed and synchronized to the applied Reference 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 136 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer Demultiplexer Modules The Frame Sync Mux Status menu will report channels set to Frame
73. the Video Frame Synchronizer reaches its roll over point If Non PCM Audio is received via TDM it is expected to be already in the output clock domain and therefore the SRC in the TDM path gets automatically bypassed Video Processing SD SDI 270Mb s standards 525 625 HD SDI 1 5Gb s standards 720p50 720p59 720p60 1080150 1080i59 94 1080i60 1080psF24 1080psF23 HD SDI 3Gb s standards SMPTE425 Level A SMPTE 372M Dual Link Framesync mode or Delay mode Freeze modes Frame Field1 Field2 High noise immunity TRS error resilience and glitchless processing fast switching without freeze of input feeds that were asynchronously switched on the recommended switching point as defined in SMPTE RP168 User selectable Loss of Video modes Black Freeze Pass Mute Video Frame Synchronizer with H V Phase control and fixed frame delay on top of variable delay Video Frame Delay up to 16 Frames all standards 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 139 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer Demultiplexer Modules e Video ProcAmp Gain Offset Hue Black White Clip e SMPTE 352M Video Payload Detection Insertion HD and 3G only e EDH SD and CRC HD Detection Insertion e Automatic ASI detection and bypass Video Processing Notes e VANC HANC data other than embedded Audio is not processed Closed Captioning data Teletext
74. through the following standard full length boards e Afour channel MADI input board with electrical or optical back module See PT MADIAX IBG MADI Input Module on page 2 see MADI Input Module PT MADIAX IBG on page 167 e Afour channel MADI output board with electrical or optical back module See PT MADIAX OBG Output Module on page 284 MADI Input AES Audio Embedded Audio Analog Audio Upto So chames exh PT MADMX BG Input Module NI PT MADMX OBG Output Module Upto 54 chames each MADI Output AES Output SDI Output Analog Output Figure 72 MADI Input and Output Modules and other audio routing options in a Frame 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 166 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Multichannel Audio Digital Interface MADI Modules Note This diagram represents Platinum MADI as well as other audio routing options in the Platinum frame For details refer to the relevant modules in the Input Modules and Output Modules chapters of this manual MADI Input Module PT MADI4X IBG The PT MADIAC IBG PT MADI40 IBG input module is an AES10 2008 compliant audio input board that supports three MADI formats 32 channel 96kHz sample rate and 56 or 64 channels 48 kHz sample rate The PT MADIAX IBG is user configurable between one and four inputs each up to 64 Audio mono channels 32 AES stereo pairs of PCM Audio The four MADI input streams can comprise up to
75. which RW e Slow parameters are updated e Medium e Fast Control Status RO i Reports current Control Status e Pease Wan e Ready to Set Note that the module remains in a 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 145 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation M anual Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer Demultiplexer Modules Name Description Type Options frozen state until this status reports Ready to Set V Bit Mute Enable RW e Yes e No Dolby E Auto Align RW Ver MK20 App S6 V6 Lists version numbers of individual BO String firmware components Module Status Reports current Module Status RO e Module Ready e Firmware Upgrade Required e Module Over Temperature Genlock Parameters Name Description Type Options Sync Select Selects which physical sync port the RW e Sync 1 module uses as a reference e Sync2 e Sync3 e Sync 4 Genlock Video Present Reports the presence of the reference RO e No video signal e Yes Genlock Video Locked Reports the locked status of the reference RO e No video signal e Yes 2015 Imagine Communicatio ns Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 146 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer Demultiplexer Modules Name Description Type Options Genlock Standard Indicates the video stand
76. y Figure 9 PX RES Resource Module PX RES in a Platinum frame The PX RES Resource Module 1 5 0 or higher can also be used in a Platinum 9 RU or 15 RU frame With PX RES in the Platinum frame not all modules are supported The following table details support for various PX and PT input output modules when PX RES is used in a Platinum 9 15 RU frame and when it s used in an IP3 frame 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 36 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Resource Module PX RES Module PX RES in PX RES in Module PX RES in PX RES in IP3 Platinum IP3 Platinum PX Input Modules PT Input Modules PX HSR9C IBG Gi v PT ADCT IB v v1 PX HSR9C1D IBG Gi V PM ADCT IB v PX HSR9O IBG Gi V PT AEBT IB v1 v1 PX HSR9O1D IBG Gi V PM AEBT IB v PX HSR8C IBG v V PT AECT IB v v PM HSR8C IBG v PM AECT IB v PX HSR2C2D IBG Gi v PT DEC IB v v PX HSR1C1D IBG Gi v PM DEC IB v PT FSDMX IBG PT FSDMXO IBG v v PT FSDX8C1D IBG v v PT FSDX801D IBG v v PT HS IB v v PT HSO PIN IB PT HSO IB v Gei PT HSR1D IBG PT HSR2D IBG v Gi PT HSR8C1D IBG v PT HSR8O1D IBG v1 Gi PT MADI4C IBG PT MADI40 IBG v v PX Output Modules PT Output Modules PX HSR16C OB
77. 0 PT FSDMX IBG 8 channel SD HD 3G Input Module with Frame Synchronizer and Demux for TDM Audio 8 BNC inputs PT FSDMXO IBG 8 channel SD HD 3G Input Module with Frame Synchronizer and Demux for TDM Audio 8 Optical inputs through 4 SFP Optical Modules PX HSRMX8X OBG Frame Synchronizer and Mux Output Module 8 16 BNC Optical outputs PT FSDX8C1D IBG 8 channel SD HD 3G Input Module with Frame Synchronizer For Matrix Expansion Analog Composite Video Modules on page 225 PT DEC IB 8 Composite signals to SDI PT ENC OB 8 channel Analog Composite Video output Modules Digital Video Modules on page 102 PX HSR9C IBG 9 channel SD HD 3G digital video input module with 9 HDBNC connectors PX HSR16C OBG 16 channel digital video SD HD 3G output module HDBNC connectors PX HSR90 IBG 9 channel SD HD 3G digital video optical input module with 9 fiber 5 SFP cages PX HSR160 OBG 16 channel digital video SD HD 3G output module 16 optical outputs through 8 SFP optical devices PX HSR9C1D IBG 9 channel SD HD 3G digital video input module with 9 HDBNC connectors and DS PX HSR802DS OBG 8 channel digital video SD HD 3G output module 8 optical SFP outputs plus DS in and out for system expansion 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 33 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Modules Fun
78. 0 e 1080i 59 94 e 1080i 60 e 1080p 50 e 1080p 59 94 e 1080p 60 e 1080p 50DL e 1080p 59 94 DL 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 119 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer Demultiplexer Modules Name Description Type Options e 1080p 60 DL e 1080sF 23 98 e 1080sF 24 Signal Presence x 8 Reports the presence of RO e No the SDI input video e Yes signal EDH Present x 8 Reports the presence of RO e No EDH in the input SDI e Yes signal CRC EDH Error Counter Reports the number of RO 0 to 65535 x 8 chrominance CRC EDH errors that have occurred CRC EDH Error Clear x Clears all CRC EDH error RW e No 8 counters e Yes Input Optical Power Reports input optical RO e Too Low Optical modules only signal power level e 32 1 dBm e Too High SFP Type Shows the type of RO e Unknown Optical modules only optical receiver installed e N A e G Dual Rx PIN EMBEDDED AUDIO STATUS Group Presence 8 x 4 Reports the presence of RO e No TABLE PARAMETER the specified audio e Yes group in the SDI signal Group Active Channels Indicates which channels RO e None 8x4 are active e CH1 TABLE PARAMETER e CH2 e CH12 e CH3 e CH13 e CH23 e CH123 e CH4 e CH14 e CH24 e CH124 e CH34 e CH134 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and C
79. 0 000 us to 17 771 us 1080p 50 1080p 50 DL e 0 000 us to 37 024 us 1080p 24 1080sF 24 e 0 000 us to 37 061 us 1080p 23 98 1080sF 23 98 e 0 000 us to 31 987 us 1080i 50 295 e 0 000 us to 22 209 us 720p 60 e 0 000 us to 22 231 us 720p 59 94 e 0 000 us to 26 653 us 720p 50 e 0 000 us to 44 431 us 720p 30 e 0 000 us to 44 475 us 720p 29 e 0 000 us to 53 320 us 720p 25 e 0 000 us to 63 518 us 525i 59 94 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 152 Installation and Operation Manual Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer Demultiplexer Modules Name Description Type Options Vertical Phase lines Adjusts the vertical RW e 0 1124 lines timing 1080p I sF 0 1249 lines 1080i 50 SMPTE 295M 0 749 lines 720p 0 524 lines 525i 59 94 0 624 lines 625i 50 Frame Offset frames Determines the number RW 0 17 frames Delay of frames the video is mode offset 0 16 frames Sync mode Force Freeze Enables video freeze RW No Yes Force Freeze Mode Specifies the type of RW Field 1 freeze field 1 field 2 or Field 2 frame Frame Loss of Video Mode Specifies operation on RW Pass loss of video pass black Black or freeze Freeze Fast Switch ds Enable fast switching RW Ng Yes F S Mux Mod RW rame Sync Mux Mode Sets the operational FS Sync Mode mode of the frame sync FS Delay Mode delay or sync Mux Au
80. 0 82W 0 82W 0 15W 0 Total per Module 56 02W 56 02W 0 15W 67W Note Includes 172 mm fan 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 275 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Module LEDs Module LEDs Card Edge LED Diagnostics There are multiple card edge LEDs on IP3 Input Modules PX IB on page 80 and Output Modules PX OB see Input Modules PX IB on page 80 Modules LED Labels LEDs are labeled as follows Input Modules INPUT 1 to INPUT 9 Output Modules OUTPUT 1 to OUTPUT 16 Under normal working conditions all the LEDs are used to indicate signal presence status Under certain abnormal conditions for instance if a module is improperly installed or the wrong kind of module is plugged in a slot designed to host another type of module card edge LEDs are used to show diagnostic information LED States There are three possible states indicated by each LED Table 122 LED States State Description Off No signal present On Signal present and reclocker locked to signal Flashing Signal present but reclocker could not lock to signal e Input Module LEDs on page 277 Input 1 and Input 2 on page 277 Input 3 Input 4 Input 5 on page 277 Input 6 Input 7 Input 8 Input 9 on page 277 e Output Module LEDs on page 278 Output 1 Output 6 on page 278 Output 7 Output 8 Outpu
81. 135 D Sink ecu c cC 137 PX HSRMX OBG Specifications erased ce tese cre iie seed e aded deoa re eade Pose de ee age Ee REER re au 141 PX HSRMX OBG OperatiOn ccce success sace ene sbacck de reb csene s b rces E Debe de qe a dar TN aaa 142 PX HSRMX OBG Controllable BDarameterz 145 PX HSRMX OBG Confteuration eene nnne nn tenn nnns nsn essentia nass s essent nsns 164 Multichannel Audio Digital Interface MADI Modules on snnnnnnnnnnnnnnsnnnnnnnnnnseseno 166 MADI Input Module DTMADIAXIBCG eene enne nennen enne nennen nennen nnn nnns n rennen 167 Variants c 168 Controlling the MADI Input Module through the Controller ccccccssssssecececessessnseeeeeeseessessnaees 169 TOM Mapping SEE H 169 MADI Audio TEE NRRRRH 173 Input Specificatii NS aces ie reto rie Ee preste eee Gs iei Hm ETE 174 Input Power CONSUMPTION NEE 175 PT MADIAX IBG Parameters acr coc et seine sane ete Rete ne CR Donc EE baee dame aaea Uo des vate temerau bine gabe Ride RTL Teen 176 MADI Output Module PT MADI4X OBG eese nennen enne sten nnne stent nest en nensis tenentes 178 EIE M 179 Controlling the MADI Output Module through the Controller esee 181 Relerence LOCKING ERIEDEEEI m 181 BP m
82. 2 kHz Ext Reference CRC Error Reports CRC error on external e No 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 192 Installation and Operation Manual Analog Digital Audio Converter Modules with TDM Parameter Description Options reference e Yes Ext Reference Lock Error Reports lock error on external e No reference e Yes Ext Reference Validity Error Reports validity error on external e No reference e Yes Ext Reference Confidence Reports confidence error on e No Error external reference e Yes Ext Reference Biphase Error Reports biphase error on external e No reference e Yes Ext Reference Parity Error Reports parity error on external e No reference e Yes Bypass 1 16 For signals routed to wideband e No bypass Table Parameter crosspoint only tells control to make switch regardless of signal presence e gnore signal presence Operating Mode Sets PM ADCT IB PT ADCT IB operating mode e Auto mode e Internal mode e External mode OdBFS setting Sets O dBFS setting for analog to digital conversion 13 dB to 28 dB in 1 dB increments Presence Hysteresis 1 16 Sets the time duration between acquisition of signal presence and release of audio muting 7 5 ms to 32 76 s in 500 ns steps Silence Delay 1 16 Sets time duration between loss of signal presence and audio muting 7 5 ms to 32 76 s in 500 ns steps
83. 20 Port 6 TP3 Test Bernard Slot 20 Port 7 TP3 Test Bernard Slot 20 Port 8 TP3 Test Bernard Slot 20 Port 1 TP3 Test Bernard Slot 20 Port 2 TP3 Test Bernard Slot 20 Port 3 TP3 Test Bernard Slot 20 Port 4 TP3 Test Bernard Slot 20 Port 5 TP3 Test Bernard Slot 20 Port 6 TP3 Test Bernard Slot 20 Port 7 TP3 Test Bernard Slot 20 Port 8 Video IP3 Test Bernard Slot 20 Port 6 Video 2 0 165 13 Validate and Save 14 Open the DB Editor and Publish 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential Resync February 2015 Page 165 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Multichannel Audio Digital Interface MADI Modules Multichannel Audio Digital Interface MADI Modules MADI Serial Multichannel Audio Digital Interface is an industry standard electronic communications protocol that defines the data format and electrical characteristics of an interface carrying multiple channels of digital audio MADI supports multi channel audio transmission through copper coaxial cable or multi mode fiber cable MADI is widely used in the audio industry especially in the professional sector Its advantages over other audio digital interface protocols and standards are support of a greater number of channels per line MADI support enables seamless integration of Audio Consoles and other third party Audio equipment with MADI I O into the Imagine Communications Audio Video routing framework MADI support is offered
84. 230VAC Greater Than 8096 Efficiency Over Input Voltage Range Output Voltages V1 5VDC V2 24VDC Output Currents 5VDC 10Amps 24VDC Output Fusing 24VDC Outputs Pins 3 and 26 of Power Connector each to be Fused to Prevent Output Current from Exceeding 40 Amps Output Power 1500 Watts Continuous Line Regulation lt 0 196 Load Regulation 2 096 for 24VDC Output 6 0 2 0 for 5VDC Output Output Noise 100mV P P 20Mhz Bandwidth Measured across 0 1uF and 10 uF capacitors connected in parallel 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 258 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual 1500 Watt Power Supply and External Power Supply Frame Item Specification Overcurrent Non destructively limit current to 110 rated maximum output Square Current Limit Protection with Automatic Recovery Overvoltage Protection Entire power supply shuts down if any output rail reaches 15 above rated voltage Current Sharing Active All Outputs N 1 Hot Swappable Diode Isolation 20 Tolerance on Loads greater than 50 Current Shares with Present Power Supply Model Holdup Time 16 milliseconds at One Half Maximum Output Power Indicators LEDs indicating 5VDC 24VDC and Fan Fail present on front cover LEDs indicate complete failure of Voltage Rails or Fan not operating or deviation from specified voltag
85. 240 The following steps walk you through the configuration and definition of output ports from both of these output modules for monitoring Launch the IP3 Database Editor 1 Open Magellan CCS Navigator 2 Goto your routing system and open the IP3 Database Editor 2 Gates GICIP3 Routing System Gl 1P3 Controller lll Platinum IP3 28RU fr Add PX HSRAEC OM Destinations 1 Gotothe Destinations tab click the Add button Add Destinations Enter the number of Destinations to create 4 Use Name Index Create D Name Prefix Name Index Alias Long Name Description MON OUT 1 Device Type HD Video Video Starting Location Frame Location Type Slo Port Channel IP3 B MON Port 1 Video 1 Maximum number of Video Ports per module 2 Maximum number of Video Channels per Port 1 Add Rows Cancel 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 238 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Output Monitoring Modules Enter 4 as number of Destinations to create Recommended Change the name in the Name Prefix field to visually distinguish this from other non monitoring destinations For example include MON OUT in the name prefix Select a Video Device Type and select the appropriate Frame Select Slot as Slot 6 Port as Port 1 Note This is to map the OUT 1 port Set Location Type to MON Settings for Slot Port Channel Max No of Ports per module and Max No of Cha
86. 281 for more details PX BP 28 Module Slots The following module slots are present on the PX BP 28 Table 126 Module Slots on the PX BP 28 Slot Type Number of Slots Input Module Slots 64 Output Module Slots 64 Video Crosspoint Module Slots Audio TDM Crosspoint Module Slots Data Switch Module Slots Resource Control Module Slots Output Monitoring Module Slot Alarm Expansion Module Slot Auxiliary Module Slot 2 2 2 2 Sync Distribution Module Slots 2 1 1 1 2 Power Distribution Slots 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 280 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Module Interconnect PX BP 28 Fuses on the Module Interconnect PX BP 28 See figure showing fuses on top of module 6 b 4 a Li 1 L LI VW L LI r LI 5 H LI mes f H Q D LS p DU LI LI LI LJ 4 LI LI Bi D m a A LV LI LI L 4 Li t 1 mu See figure showing nt bun See figure showing fuses on left arm fuses on right arm of module i of module ks ai me thy La LU D D L 4 4 a z D H a i E ee e e pr gr gr e mm er gr gr gr mm o AA Dr gr gr gr ir Sr w n 13 See figure showing fuses on bottom of module 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 281 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operatio
87. 3 For Modules with SFPs OP SFP TT 27 29 only OP4SFP TT431433 OP SFP T1 35 37 OP SFP T1 39 41 OP SFP T1 43 45 OP SFP T1T 47 49 OP SFP T1 51 53 OP SFP T1 55 57 OP SFP T1 59 61 NO SFP Parameters and Faults View Parameters Faults Software Version 3 7 Advanced Sync Select Sync 1 Temperature degC 50 Control FPGA Version 108 Module Status Module Ready Figure 37 Module Parameters Input Parameters Input Parameters are accessed by clicking the Inputs option below the Module in the parameter menu list Parameters and Faults view Parameters Faults 4 PX HSRSCID IBG Auvaiicad 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 85 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Input Modules PX IB Input parameters are grouped into a Table and can be accessed by clicking the Show Table button Inputs Show Table The following parameters are displayed Table 39 Input Parameters Name Description Type Options Signal Presence Reports presence or absence of valid signal RO Yes No Video Standard Detects video standard Unknown 525i 59 94 625i 50 1035i 60 1035i 59 94 1080i 60 1080i 59 94 1080i 50 1080psf 24 1080psf 23 98 1080p 30 1080p 29 97 1080p 25 1080p 24 1080p 23 98 720p 60 720p 59 94 1080p 60 1080p 59 94 1080p 50 1080i 50 295M 720p 50 720p 25 720p 24 720
88. 32x6 O Two slot Platinum SX Pro with 32 input channels six SDI outputs and six optical SDI outputs HV SXP 64x6 Four slot Platinum SX Pro with 64 input channels six HDMI outputs and six SDI outputs HV SXP 64x6 O Four slot Platinum SX Pro with 32 input channels six SDI outputs and six fiber optical SDI outputs 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 35 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Resource Module PX RES Resource Module PX RES Resource Module PX RES Overview The PX RES Resource Module serves as the central control point for the Platinum IP3 frame and all modules that reside in the frame The PX RES is a control module with software and hardware components that control communications between the different processing modules Input Output Crosspoint Fans Power Supplies in an IP3 frame It also enables communication with the Platinum IP3 Controller for configuration control monitoring and routing The PX RES module provides the sync processing necessary to determine the switch timing for the frame The control system reports the presence and type of sync signal detected on each of the four SYNC inputs The PX RES module distributes the synchronization signals to all the crosspoint and output monitoring modules in the frame It also automatically generates and distributes an internal synchronization signal when no external sync input is present
89. 4V Power Rail 5V Power Rail Total Power PX ALARM DATA DW 0 4W 6 4W Expansion PX 576x1024 3G 236W 0 1W 236 1W PX ATDM64 X28 55W 0 8W 55 8W PX FRONT FAN TOP 55 2W 0 82W 56 02W PX FRONT FAN BOT 55 2W 0 82W 56 02W PX REAR FAN ADPTR O 0 15W 0 15W PX REAR FAN 67W 0 67W PX HSR9C IBG 10 7W 0 43W 11 13W PX HSR90 IBG 14W 0 43W 14 43W PX HSR9C1D IBG 13W 0 43W 13 43W PX HSR901D IBG 16 3W 0 43W 16 73W PX HSR16C OBG 11 7W 0 43W 12 13W PX HSR160 OBG 21 9W 0 43W 22 33W PX HSR802DS OBG 18W 0 43W 18 43W PX HSR8C2DS OBG 14 1W 0 43W 14 53W PT FSDMX IBG 50W 0 15W 50 15W PT FSDMXO IBG 52W 0 15W 52 15W PT FSDX8C1D IBG 52W 0 15W 52 15W LEGACY PLATINUM MODULES Module Consumption PT MADIAC IBG 15W PT MADI4O IBG 18W PT MADI4C OBG 22W PT MADI40 OBG 25W PT ADCT IB 24 7W PT DACT OB 14 7W PT AECT IB 2 4W PT AEBT IB PT AECT OB 6 5W PT AEBT OB PT DEC IB 13W PT ENC OB 10W 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential Introduction February 2015 Page 28 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Introduction Video Matrix Expansion Output Matrix Expansion The Platinum IP3 Frame when used in isolation provides a 576x1024 matrix with 9 Inputs per Input Slot and 16 Outputs per Output Slot The number of Outputs can be expanded by distributing Input signals to one or more Frames Matrix Expansion Input Modules help distribute input signals across multiple frames
90. 56 the TDM stream gets Channels encapsulated into the TDM 33 88 56 MADI transport stream Channels TDM 65 120 56 Channels TDM 1 64 64 Channels TDM 33 96 64 Channels TDM 65 128 64 Channels 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 188 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Analog Digital Audio Converter Modules with TDM Analog Digital Audio Converter Modules with TDM Audio A D Input Modules with TDM Capability PT ADCT IB Operation Figure 82 PM ADCT IB PT ADCT IB Module The PM ADCT IB PT ADCT IB audio A D input module provides analog audio to AES digital audio conversion within the Platinum routing system Two optional builds one option with High Z inputs the other with 600Q terminated inputs provide 16 stereo channels of conversion with standard Platinum 1 O module features This option will provide the user higher conversion capacity 16 stereo channels made available via Imagine Communications TDM Time Division Multiplexing architecture To reduce idle channel noise in systems using A D and D A converters audio level sensing circuitry is included that will mute the output i e set all sample data 0 when the analog input is lost The level at which input signal presence is determined is user adjustable and includes a minimal level which effectively disables the function The duration for which this minimum amplitu
91. 75Q Signal type AES3id SMPTE 276M AES frame rates from 32 kHz to 192 kHz Other 4096 6096 duty cycle digital signals 2 Mb s to 25 Mb s Input amplitude 0 1Vp p to 2Vp p Nominal input amplitude 1 0Vp p 10 Return loss gt 30 dB 0 1 MHz to 6 MHz gt 25 dB 6 MHz to 12 MHz Power Consumption Table 100 PT AECT IB PT AEBT IB Power Consumption Power Consumption 2 4W 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 216 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual AES Balanced Coaxial Modules with TDM Capability AES Balanced Coaxial Output Modules with TDM Capability PT AEBT OB PT AECT OB Operation Figure 96 PT AECT OB Module The AES TDM output module allows for the connection of 16 output channels of AES digital audio using either a balanced or coaxial back module within the Platinum platform and supports Time Division Multiplexed TDM AES routing 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 217 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual AES Balanced Coaxial Modules with TDM Capability Audio processing functions as well as signal level conversion and presence detection are handled within an FPGA based circuit The 16 channel TDM output module uses only one high speed LVDS signal to receive the various AES signals for presentation at the outputs The AES TDM output module als
92. Back Module PT FSDX8C1D IBG Distributing Outputs to 2 Frames The following graphic depicts how the PT FSDX8C1D IBG and the PT HSR1D IBG can be used together to distribute the 8 possible SDI inputs to 2 frames expanding the available outputs Using a DensiShield cable to connect the DensiShield output of Frame 1 to the DensiShield input of Frame 2 the eight inputs from Frame 1 can be directly routed through the DensiShield out of Frame 1 to the inputs in Frame 2 IP Interconnect MI 512 Video Inputs d INPUTS 1 8 512 Video Output Module Outputs Platinum Frame 1 Platinum Frame 2 512 Video Outputs Figure 61 Using the PT FSDX8C1D IBG and PT HSR1D IBG to distribute the outputs of one frame to the inputs of a second frame 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 131 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer Demultiplexer Modules PT FSDX8C1D IBG Parameters The PT FSDX8C1D IBG Module can be controlled via the Controller When you access a PT FSDX8C1D IBG module by clicking on it in the list of modules its parameters are displayed The total number of PT FSDX8C1D IBG modules in the frame is also displayed on the left PT FSDX8C1D IBG PT FSDX8C1D IBG Modules PT FSDX8C1D IBG PT FSDX8C1D IBG PT FSDX8C1D IBG PT FSDX8C1D IBG PT FSDX8C1D IBG General Genlock PT FSDX8C1D IBG gt Input b Processing Version To
93. CCIR RMS Dynamic range gt 100 dB CCIR RMS Crosstalk gt 90 dB isolation 20 Hz to 20 kHz all hostile typical hostile channels driven at 1 dBFS 23 dBu Table 94 PT DACT OB Digital to Analog Audio Output 600W Version Item Specification Number of outputs 16 Output type Balanced Output connector DB 44 Impedance 600Q Signal type Stereo analog audio 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 207 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Maximum output amplitude Analog Digital Audio Converter Modules with TDM 22 dBm Full scale adjustment range O dBFS 7 dBm to 22 dBm in 1 dB steps 0 5 dB DC offset OV 0 05V Conversion type 128x oversampling fifth order delta sigma Resolution 24 bits AES frame rates 32 kHz 192 kHz Gain stability 0 01 dB Frequency response 0 25 dB 20 Hz to 20 kHz Linearity deviation lt t 0 5 dB THD N lt 0 01 997 Hz 1 dBFS 17 dBm Idle channel noise lt 100 dBFS CCIR RMS Dynamic range gt 100 dB CCIR RMS Crosstalk gt 90 dB isolation 20 Hz to 20 kHz all hostile typical hostile channels driven at 1 dBFS 17 dBm Power Consumption Table 95 PT DACT OB Power Consumption Power Consumption 14 7W 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 208
94. Clip Detect Show Table Figure 98 PT AEST OB Parameters Functional Block Diagram Input 1A j Input 1B p Input 1C Input 1D Input 2A gt AES output 1 Input 2B j P Input 2C gt Monitor 1 Input 2D p Input 3A AES output 2 Input 3B Monitor 2 Input 3C Input 3D gt AES output 3 Input 4A j a Input 4B gt d Monitor 3 Input 4C p Input 4D gt Input 5A Input 5B 9 Input SC gt FPGA based signal mpu m presence detection and Input 6B internal distribution T Input 6C gt s Input 6D gt Input 7A Input 7B gt Input ZE AES output 16 npu bhi Input 8A 9 Monitor 16 Input 8B gt Input 8C gt Input 8D gt TDM input gt Internal control bus 24VA in Card status and from frame m 5V signal presence 24VB in On board p 3 3V LEDs H l gt PIPE from frame gt supply L 9 2 5V Control logic Back module gt PRTI 5VL in p gt 1 2V ID signals from frame Figure 99 PT AEBT OB PT AECT OB Functional Block Diagram 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 221 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual AES Balanced Coaxial Modules with TDM Ca
95. Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 116 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer Demultiplexer Modules Name Description Type Options Temperature x 2 Indicates the RO lt String gt in Degrees TABLE PARAMETER temperature of the Celsius FPGA Fan Status Indicates proper RO e Bad TABLE PARAMETER functioning of the e Good module s fan unit FPGA x 2 DDR Memory Indicates proper RO e Bad Status x 2 functioning of the DDR e Good TABLE PARAMETER memory Parameter Update Rate Defines the rate at RW e Slow which parameters are e Medium updated e Fast Control Status RO RO e Please Wait e Ready to Set Parameters and Faults View Parameters Faults 4 PT FSDMX IBG Serial Number 34 mm 0123456789 Genlock License Key gt Input gt Processing Version Licensed Options None Temperature Show Table Fan Status Show Table FPGA 1 DDR Status Show Table FPGA 2 DDR Status Show Table Parameter Update Rate Fast Control Status Ready to Set Figure 54 PT FSDMX IBG General Parameters 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 117 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer Demultiplexer Modules Genlock Parameters Table 64 PT FSDMX IBG Genlock Parameters Name Description Type Op
96. Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 200 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Analog Digital Audio Converter Modules with TDM Back Panel I O Module for PT DACT OB The PT A2 BP back panel I O module corresponds to the PT DACT OB module DB 44 connectors are used on the PT A2 BP The optional PT A2 DTB terminal block adapter is available to accommodate wiring of individual signals to the frame Figure 87 PT A2 DTB Terminal Block Adapter Installation All output modules and back panel modules are installed at our manufacturing facility See Installing Input and Output Modules on page 363 for the procedure for field expansion or replacement of output modules If you need to purchase additional components please contact your dealer or our Sales Department Control This Module s parameters can be enabled and or changed via CCS Navigator or the Platinum IP3 Controller 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 201 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Controllable Parameters Analog Digital Audio Converter Modules with TDM Table 91 PT DACT OB User Controllable Parameters List Parameter Description Options Out Tone 1 16 Table Parameter Indicates type of tone to send out AES output e Pass input e Silence e 500Hz e 1K Polarity Reversal 1 32 Table Parameter Reverses and t
97. Converter Modules with TDM Functional Block Diagram pee eee eee eee i IO DT ttit HI ttit DI D Dt LT tti ttt titi ttt ttf Figure 89 PM DACT OB PT DACT OB Functional Block Diagram 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 205 Output driver Output cell 5 Output cell 6 Output cell 7 Output cell 8 Output cell 9 Output cell 10 Output cell 11 Output cell 15 Output cell 16 2A 2D 3A 3D 4 4D 54 5D 6 6D 84 8D 1A 1D E AES input AES input AES input AES input AES input AES input 7A 7D AES input TDM input Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Pinout Diagram Table 92 PT DACT OB Pinout Information Analog Digital Audio Converter Modules with TDM ed Cc 1 OOoOooooooooooooo 3000000000000000020516 Ooooooooooooooo 1 OoOoooooooooooooo 300000000000o0oooo0 16 OOooooooooooooo 44 31 E 31 Outputs 1 DB 44Pin Outputs5 DB 44Pin Outputs9 DB 44Pin Outputs 13 DB 44 Pin 4 No 8 No 12 No 16 No 1A 15 5A 8 9A 15 13A 8 1A 30 5A 7 9A 30 13A 7 1A Gnd 44 5A 6A 22 9A Gnd 44 13A 14A 22 Gnd Gnd 1B 43 5B 36 9B 43 13B 36 1B 28 5B 21 9B 28 13B 21 1B Gnd 42 5B Gnd 35 9B Gnd 42 13B Gnd 35 2A 14 6A 6 10A 14 14A 6 2A 13 6A 5 10A 13 14A 5 2A Gnd 29 6B 34 10A Gnd 29 14B 34 2B 41 6B 19 10B 41 14B 19 2B 26 6B
98. D Aa AnA EC KK Figure 15 PX ALARM Module in an Platinum IP3 Frame 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 51 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Alarm Expansion Module PX ALARM FAIL SAFE A 2 oa A8 3 eS PERS Exe igen FAIL SAFE D Figure 16 PX ALARM Module PX ALARM Components The PX ALARM module consists of two cards assembled together as a single module PX ALARM and plugged into the rear of the Platinum IP3 frame PX ALARM ATDM Audio TDM Expansion and Alarm Card PX ALARM DATA Data Expansion and Alarm Card The Platinum IP3 frame has two rows of connectors for the PX ALARM module Each slot consists of one 60 pin and one 140 pin Samtec card edge connector The PX ALARM DATA card goes into one slot and the PX ALARM ATDM card goes into the other one Both are assembled as a single module and inserted into the frame Audio Expansion A single Platinum IP3 frame has 64 input slots and 8SDI inputs per slot If you assume 16 embedded audio channels per SDI signal that is a total of 8192 mono audio channels The size of the Audio and Data Routing matrix can be further increased through expansion Audio Channels from one Platinum IP3 frame can be made available to a second Platinum IP3 frame The audio channels are sent from the Audio TDM Crosspoint module to the PX ALARM module s DensiShield outputs Note When interconnecting tw
99. DI inputs contribute to the stream A maximum of 128 mono channels can be mapped to the TDM stream 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 169 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Multichannel Audio Digital Interface MADI Modules The Mapping parameter category provides a MADI to TDM map section in which you can select the channels in each stream to map to the TDM Parameters and Faults View Parameters Faults Back To Parameters Mappi 4 PT MADIAC IBG SETS General PT MADI4C IBG Mapping MADI to TDM map 1 TDM Locking b MADI Input MADI to TDM map MADI to TDM map 1 A map 2 Mapping For each of the 4 inputs you can choose whether or not its channels contribute to the TDM stream Unused channels in the TDM stream are muted Mapping from MADI inputs to the TDM stream has a granularity of 32 channels aligned at 32 channel boundaries 56 channel formats are treated as 64 channel formats with the unused uppermost channels always muted The following table shows how signals are processed based on the actual input present and the MADI to TDM map settings If the selected MADI input is not present associated channels on the TDM bus are muted and marked as inactive Table 77 Combinations of MADI to TDM map selections and signal status Input Status MADI to TDM map Result No input present 32 channels 32 channels allocated on the TDM bu
100. E D DO LLLI 40 Ethernet PON 3 2 eode ect Re re tesa egre RE EEUU Re e ER ENEE deeg Eege gees 40 SYNG POMS 4 3 mani aaa ee 41 PATA TEE 42 LTC Bi Directional POT root ne eerte E S Eege Een cadets 42 IR 42 BULUM 44 RUSS et 45 KY PWS cc5 E EEE 45 senal peg CG 45 Resource Card Synchronization iore cto eani uten ree de ee ee oe RR pesce o deueeukssaechadedeeaneesendegeeeuenade 47 Active and Standby Determination cccccscccccecessssscsececceecessesnnaeseeecsesesesaeaeeeescesseeaaeaeeeeseeesesenaees 47 SYNE NOTES m anes 47 el en MIMS le EE 48 TEE 50 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 4 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Contents Power CONSUMPTION vseatccsecisncscavacntsdenssicdchendacntateas site ches ata Eed ee eg Ee 50 Sta EL DEE 50 Alarm Expansion Module PX ALARIV ssccvndeviev i nir ERCPEKEFEREVERPY CHEFEREFERUVEFEFEREFEN FCHENRE 51 PX ALARM OVEFVI W mE 51 PX ALARM COMPONENTS wz ccessccccecsacccuesnawcccesaaecncs anian aE Ea AEAEE EAER E Eaa 52 Audio EXPANSION eiee e n E ews E ies wee iw 52 Controlling Fan Speed 53 Reporting Alarms and Fan Failures esee esee andaina naiiai 53 General PurposedInterface GPl iet ee 55 Micro Dsub Connector Pinouts cceccccesssssecesssncecessseaececseeaececseaaeceeseaaececeeaaeeeeseaaeeeeseaaeeeeseaaeeeeneaaes 56 P
101. ENC OB Module Out Chroma Filter Luma Filter Video Standard Show Table Show Table Show Table Pedestal Enable Figure 104 PT ENC OB Parameters 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Show Table Show Table Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 234 Analog Composite Video Modules Functional Block Diagram Installation and Operation Manual Platinum IP3 AG b km ZAS Z gAve Swed Lg cr Ajddns uo lt pieoq uo 4 4 s VAVC JoMOd AG Duuouuou1 eJnjrej Jjewod ejnpojN uondo s eufiis Jouy 0j jeus PETER m S 131 e2uesaud jeubis b Jdid JoujUoD Swed JOWUOW jeuJ9ju Ao ee EE pue gau pled lonuo LANA Jeuonoeuipig Jel 20 Q8 Y8 sindino Q4 V4 sindino Q9 v9 sindino Oel EJ Tid 2007 XOL cm ui ONS e Y QI ng 5 EE coo sc s l EDE SC ER 25 x 4 491 ndino L indino SS l sseg SE 2 25 SE DX aga2 Jeppe ou S DEN Sos EE lt R F gi 1ndin 88 Ruf e f deuss A guo AS 9 e 888 xnuij 8H NANO 3 go ewn Bolg sseujuBu LX wt andino February 2015 Page 235 iagram Proprietary and Confidential ional Block D PT ENC OB Funct Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice Specifications 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Figure 105 Platinum IP3 Ins
102. FP MADI Table Parameter plugged in 2TX e Unknown e NO SFP TDM Locking TDM Reference Source Selects which physical Sync1 sync port the module Sync2 uses for the TDM Sync3 reference TDM Reference Present RO Reports the presence of No the reference signal Yes TDM Reference Locked RO Reports the locked status No of the reference signal Yes TDM Reference Standard RO Indicates the reference Unknown standard detected on the 525j 59 94 genlock input 625i 50 indue S MER 720p 25 marked with an asteris 720p 29 97 can be detected but they P cannot be used in 720p 30 connection with the PT 720p 50 MADIxx OBG since the 720p 59 94 output sample rate is 720p 60 always 48kHz 1080p 23 98 1080p 24 1080p 29 97 1080p 30 1080p 25 1080i 50 1080i 59 94 1080i 60 1080sF 23 98 1080sF 24 DARS 192kHz DARS 96kHz 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 185 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Multichannel Audio Digital Interface MADI Modules Path Parameter Name Description Options DARS 88 2kHz DARS 48kHz DARS 44 1kHz DARS 32kHz MADI Locking MADI Reference Source Selects which physical Synci sync port the module Sync2 uses for the TDM Sync3 BEER Same as TDM Ref MADI Reference Present RO Reports the presence of No the reference signal Yes MADI Reference Locked RO Reports the locked status No of the referen
103. G G V PT AEBT OB TA v PX HSR8C2D OBG G V PM AEBT OB v1 PX HSR8O2D OBG Gi v PT AECT OB v v PX HSR160 OBG Gi V PM AECT OB v PX HSRSXP2D OBG v PT DACT OB v1 v1 PX HSRMX8C2D OBG Gi v PM DACT OB v1 Gi PX HSRMX802D OBG v PT ENC OB v v PX HSR8CMX8C OBG Gi v PM ENC OB v PX HSR8OMX80 OBG v PT HSR OB v v PM HSR OB v1 Gi PT HSR OBG v v PM HSR OBG PT HSRO OBG v Gi PT HSRMX8C OBG v PT HSRMX8O OBG v 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 37 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Resource Module PX RES PT MADI4C OBG PT MADI40 OBG v1 v1 PT SR OBG PM SR OBG v PX Frame Modules PT Frame Modules PX 576x1024 3G G PM 64x64 3G9 v PX ALARM ATDM v PM 128x128 3G9 v1 PX ALARM DATA Gi v PT 128x256 3G15 vI PX ATDM64 X28 G V PT ALARM v1 PX FRONT FAN Gi V PM ATDM16 X9 v PX HSRAEC OM Gi v PT ATDM16 X15 v1 Gi PX RES Gi V PT HSRAEC OM v PT SYNC v1 v1 Multiviewer Modules PX SXP 16x3 v v PX SXP 32x6 v v PX SXP 64x6 v v1 PX SXP 16x3 O v v PX SXP 32x6 O v v1 PX SXP 64x6 O v v PX SXP 16x3 OD G v1 PX SXP 32x6 OD v PX SXP 64x6 OD v PX RES Parameters and Upgrades For details refer the P
104. IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Preface Manual Information Purpose Preface This manual details the features installation operation maintenance and specifications for the Platinum IP3 Audience This manual is written for engineers technicians and operators responsible for installation setup maintenance and or operation of the Platinum IP3 Revision History Edition Date Comments A December 2012 Preliminary Version B January 2013 First Release C October 2014 Third Release D February 2015 Fourth Release e Support for PX RES in Platinum 5 RU and 9 RU Frames See PX RES in a Platinum frame on page 36 Writing Conventions This manual adheres to the following writing conventions Table 1 Writing Conventions Term or Convention Description Bold Indicates dialog box property sheet field button check box list box combo box menu submenu window list and selection names Italics Indicates email addresses names of books and publications and first instances of new terms and specialized words that need emphasis 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 13 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Preface Term or Convention Description CAPS Indicates a specific key on the keyboard such as ENTER TAB CTRL ALT DELETE Code Indicates variables or command line en
105. Imagine COMMUNICATIONS QW Installation and Operation Manual Platinum IP3 Frame and Modules February 2015 Edition D Delivering the Moment imaginecommunications com Platinum IP3 Frame and Modules Installation and Operation Manual Publication Information 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential Imagine Communications considers this document and its contents to be proprietary and confidential Except for making a reasonable number of copies for your own internal use you may not reproduce this publication or any part thereof in any form by any method for any purpose or in any language other than English without the written consent of Imagine Communications All others uses are illegal This publication is designed to assist in the use of the product as it exists on the date of publication of this manual and may not reflect the product at the current time or an unknown time in the future This publication does not in any way warrant description accuracy or guarantee the use for the product to which it refers Imagine Communications reserves the right without notice to make such changes in equipment design specifications components or documentation as progress may warrant to improve the performance of the product Trademarks Platinum Platinum IP3 Magellan Magellan CCS Navigator are trademarks or trade names of Imagine Communications or its subsidiaries M
106. Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 60 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Video Crosspoint Module PX 576x1024 3G Video Crosspoint Module PX 576x1024 3G Video Crosspoint Module PX 576x1024 3G Overview The PX 576x1024 3G Video Crosspoint Module is the core switching matrix that enables 576x1024 switching within a single Platinum IP3 frame You can switch any of the 576 input signals to any of the 1024 outputs based on commands from the system control The module supports AES SDI up to 3 Gb s and other serial digital signals The PX 576x1024 3G module also reports on current Crosspoint configuration status Figure 23 PX 576x1024 3G Video Crosspoint Module 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 61 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Video Crosspoint Module PX 576x1024 3G Video Crosspoint Module PX 576x1024 3G Location in the Frame The Platinum IP3 frame includes two slots for Video Crosspoint modules One slot holds the Primary Active Video Crosspoint Module The second slot holds an optional Redundant Shadow module which shadows all operations of the active module so as to allow it to become active in case the active module is removed or halted due to error The shadow module s outputs are disabled until it becomes active but otherwise performs all operations in parallel with the primary cross
107. Multichannel Audio Digital Interface MADI Modules Functional Block Parameter Name R W Description Options 1080i 59 94 1080i 60 MADI Input MADI Present MADI Present 1 4 R Reports the presence ofthe No Table Parameter reference signal Yes Number of Channels Number of Channels 1 Reports the number of 0 Table Parameter 4 channels in the MADI Input 32 56 64 Sample Rate Sample Rate 1 4 R Sample Rate in kHz Table Parameter MADI 1 4 Active MADI lt 1 4 gt 01 16 R Bit map for each active String Channel channel MADI 1 4 17 32 R Bit map for each active String channel MADI 1 4 33 48 R Bit map for each active String channel MADI 1 4 49 64 R Bit map for each active String channel Mapping MADI to TDM map MADI to TDM map 1 4 Indicates how to map MADI None Table Parameter signal to TDM 32 56 64 SFP 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 177 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Multichannel Audio Digital Interface MADI Modules Functional Block Parameter Name R W Description Options Input Optical Power Input Optical Power 1 R Reports Input Optical Power e Too Low Table Parameter 4 gt e Too High e Unknown e 31 dBmto 1 dBm SFP Type SFP Type 1 2 R Reports type of SFP e OP SFP MADI Table Parameter plugged in
108. PT MADI4C IBG Mapping MADI to TDM map 3 TDT TOM map TWADIIS TOM map T RES Se 64 MADI to TDM map MA MA o 64 MADI to TDM map 3 MADI to TDM map 4 In the Controller UI e Open up the MADI Input Module e Goto Mapping in the navigation tree e Set all MADI Inputs 1 and 3 to 64 in the MADI to TDM Map Combination 32 56 channel MADI Inputs 3 and 4 mapped This example depicts different channel configurations in the incoming MADI MADI inputs 1 3 are 32 channel MADI input 4 is 56 channel MADI Inputs 3 and 4 have been mapped to the TDM All other channels are muted Other possible mapping scenarios in this situation include 1 mapping channels 21 3 96 channels 2 mapping channel 4 56 channels considered as 64 channels plus two of three 32 channel inputs 64 channels Back To Parameters Mapping PT MADI4C IBG Mapping MADI to TDM map 4 MADI to TDM map 56 In the Controller UI e Open up the MADI Input Module e Goto Mapping in the navigation tree e Set all MADI Input 3 to 32 and MADI Input 4 to 56 in the MADI to TDM Map 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 172 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Multichannel Audio Digital Interface MADI Modules MADI Audio Formats MADI sources and or destinations are typically assigned as either Mono or Stereo format For Mono configuration the default MADI mapping using the Multiplex Mono Audi
109. R FRAME SET ALL SWITCH POSITIONS CLOSED ON SET ALL SWITCH POSITIONS OPEN OFF 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 262 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual 1500 Watt Power Supply and External Power Supply Frame Figure 122 Dip Switches SW1 and SW2 on the PX PD TOP when installed in the External Power Supply frame PX FR EXPS DON T l KIE E SWS PERELDODEDE FI EST 4 s so gt PFXPS4 Figure 123 Dip Switches SW3 and SW4 on the PX PD TOP when installed in the External Power Supply frame PX FR EXPS 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 263 Platinum P3 Installation and Operation Manual 1500 Watt Power Supply and External Power Supply Frame Fuses on the PX PD TOP PPDTOP2 Figure 124 Fuses on the PX PD TOP Table 117 PX PD TOP Fuse Ratings Fuse Type Fuse Rating Part Number Fastblow 10 Amps 127 100013Q00 Bottom Power Distribution Module PX PD BOT The PX PD BOT Bottom Power Distribution Module is used only in the IP3 frame and not in the External Power Supply PX FR EXPS Figure 125 PX PD BOT Power Distribution Module 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 264 Platinum P3 Installation and Operation Manual 1500 Watt Power Supply and External Power Supply Frame Fuses on the PX PD BOT
110. RONT FAN and PX REAR FAN Modules Servicing the Fans The following fan parts can be replaced in the field e Top PX FRONT FAN array module e Bottom PX FRONT FAN array module e Individual front fan units e Individual rear fan units Front Fan Module To replace a Front Fan module follow these steps 1 After opening the front door of the frame locate the faulty fan module 2 Loosen the two thumbscrews and then swing the module to the left Loosen these thumbscrews Figure 128 Front Fan Module Array Top Module Shown 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 269 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual PX FRONT FAN and PX REAR FAN Modules 3 Disconnect the wiring harness by squeezing the white connector tabs together and gently pulling apart the connector Hinge pin queeze the hite tabs to nlock the onnector 5 Figure 129 Unlocking Wire Connector Lift the module up and out of its hinge Swing open the other fan module array to ease the replacement process Insert the replacement module NOW P Reconnect the wiring harness Note the connector has a key slot see Figure Figure 130 Wire Connector 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 270 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual PX FRONT FAN and PX REAR FAN Modules 8 Swing the module closed and then tighten the t
111. Rates Note The use of two different Video Ref Standards for example TDM 525 and MADI 625 is not supported Supported DARS Ref Rates are 192kHz 96kHz 48kHz 32kHz Supported Video Ref Standards are 525 625 HD tri level sync various formats Output Specifications Table 82 Electrical Output Specifications Item Specification Number of Outputs 4 Connector BNC IEC169 8 Impedance 75 Ohm Output Level 600mV Link rate 125Mbit s 4B5B encoded NRZI Return Loss NA Table 83 Optical Output Specifications Item Specification Number of Outputs 4 Fiber Type Multi mode works with 50 125um or 62 5 125um cables Package 2x Dual Channel Transmitter SFP Modules Connector LC with PC UPC polish Center Wavelength 1300nm Output Power 19dBm to 12dBm Distance up to 2000m Extinction Rate 8 2dB min Link rate 125Mbit s 4B5B encoded NRZI Qualified Devices Optoway SPM 3102W 2TG Laser Safety Class 1 Laser Product 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 183 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Multichannel Audio Digital Interface MADI Modules Output Power Consumption PT MADI40 OBG Power Consumption Table 84 PT MADI40 OBG Power Consumption Power Consumption 25W includes front module and back module 2x Dual Tx SFPs
112. Sync Ports on page 41 with looping connectors e One Alarm Port on page 42 e Two Serial Ports on page 45 e Two XY Ports on page 45 with loop through e One LTC Bi Directional Port on page 42 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 39 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Resource Module PX RES User Interfaces Ethernet Ports There are 4 Ethernet connectors available to users on the Communication Backplane PX CBP labeled from 1 to 4 B O T T O M Figure 11 Ethernet Ports on the PX CBP Back Panel e Ethernets 1 and 2 are connected to the PX RES in Slot 1 Top slot e Ethernets 3 and 4 are connected to the PX RES in Slot 2 Bottom slot e Only the Active PX RES Module s Ethernet ports are active e Ethernet ports on standby PX RES modules are disabled but still physically connected link LEDs function correctly Rear Ethernet Ports IP Address 1 192 168 100 250 IP Address 2 192 168 101 250 Changing the Default IP Address of the Rear Ethernet Ports Ethernet settings can be changed via the Controller To do this 1 Launch the Platinum IP3 Controller UI in a web browser select your Platinum IP3 Frame and click Go to Device Click the Configure Frame link in the top right hand corner Select Ethernet Ports from the menu on the left and make changes on the right Note Ethernet parameters suffixed with 1 refer to PX RES 1
113. X PWR ADPTR Table 128 PX PWR ADPTR Fuse Ratings Fuse Name Fuse Type Fuse Rating Part Number F1 F2 Fastblow 40 Amps 127 100014Q00 F3 Fastblow 12 Amps 127 100015Q00 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 291
114. age 174 for details 161 001103Q00 REVA Figure 76 PT MADI40 IBG optical back module 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 168 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Multichannel Audio Digital Interface MADI Modules Controlling the MADI Input Module through the Controller You can access and control PT MADI4X IBG parameters through the Controller by selecting it in the list of modules and then clicking Open Module Uist Faults Category Category Input Cards 54 items LE 1 Input Cards 3 6 91 Open Module Open Module Open Module MADI Presence MADI Presence on each of the four input streams is automatically detected and reported in the MADI Present section of the MADI Input category Parameters and Faults View Parameters Faults Back To Parameters 4 PT MADI4C IBG MADI Input General PT MADI4C IBG MADI Input MADI Present 1 TDM Locking gt MADI Input qoem EE MADI Present Mapping If MADI is present the following information is reported e The number of channels per input stream 32 56 or 64 along with the sample rate for each stream e Each MADI input is divided into chunks of 16 channels 1 16 17 32 33 48 and 49 64 and these are reported as active or not TDM Mapping Through the PT MADI4X IBG parameter interface channels in MADI inputs can be manually mapped to the TDM stream and you can select if one or all of the MA
115. al Specification esee nnne nnn ens 258 Power Supply LED Operation 555 5 12 3 apr hte Rer pee nap Rote nop nte RP Rec Rn ape en Repente EERS 259 Power Connector PINOUT eere reet iere paene neue ee Pea i aaka uo n eaae aee EXE Ee ov EXER SERRE Xe ET Uneven nre YE Vas En EN 260 Power Distribution Modules etr tenter een rantan sE ona e nena en naa ea EES deg 261 Top Power Distribution Module DN DD TOPl enne nnne nnne nnne nnne nnns 261 Bottom Power Distribution Module PX PD BOT sees 264 PX FRONT FAN and PX REAR FAN Module 266 Operation of the Fan Modules sss nnnn seen nnns stent sterne ns sese nn sse nennen 266 Setrvicingthe Fansite eoe ee eto ies eate ces Delos mater ed 269 Front Fan Module neenon eeepc een ecce E Gee Ra sonde gea pad A Edda ag satcedavsaddenss sitdeneosacecdevsobdedevsncee 269 his alc E 272 dri 273 Fuses on Front Fan Modules erret rece ree rhe er vatuccesvaacccdssabececvsbbseedsvabacedovabacedseanes 273 Fuses on Rear Fan Adapter Boards cccssccccssssececeesnececseseeecseseeecseaeeecseaaeeeesesaeeeseeaueeesseaeeseeeaaes 274 Power COnSummptlOEn secos ee agedeelt ee 275 Module LEDS cc cn mcr 276 Card Edge LED DIaBnOStiCS tociens r esto aee res odes ege 276 MED LAD I M 276 LED States fm E
116. alizing Solid Green FPGA has configured and the control system is communicating with the card Flashing Green Alarm condition on the card ACT OUT Active Output Warning Yellow Output on card being used by one or more outputs Module LEDs See Module LEDs Controllable Parameters For Output Modules the Controllable Parameters List is a multilevel structure that includes all of the available parameters arranged into the following groupings e Module Root Level Parameters on page 97 e Output Parameters on page 97 e Advanced Parameters on page 99 Parameter Notes e Parameters can be enabled and or changed via CCS Navigator or the IP3 Controller e Parameters marked with the RO designator are read only e Parameters marked Expansion Modules Only apply only to expansion modules such as PX HSR8O2DS OBG Output Module and PX HSR8C2DS OBG Output Module e Parameters marked Modules with SFPs Only apply only to optical modules such as PX HSR160 OBG Output Module 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 96 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Output Modules PX OB Module Root Level Parameters The following parameters are displayed at the root level when you click the Module in the parameter menu list Table 45 Output Modules Root Parameters Name Description Type Options Software Version Software version of micro RO
117. and Dolby D Parameters and Faults View Parameters Faults Back To Parameters 4 PT MADI4C OBG TDM Input General PT MADI4C OBG TDM Input TDM Audio Format 1 TDM Locking MADI Locking y TDM Audio Format TDM Input M Aud d CH PCM MADI Output TDM Output Mapping You can map portions of the TDM stream to one or more of the four MADI outputs The MADI Output Format section provides mapping options for each of the 4 MADI Outputs You can map predefined channel ranges in chunks of 56 or 64 channels The following options are available e TDM 1 56 56 channels e TDM 33 88 56 channels e TDM 65 120 56 channels e TDM 1 64 64 channels e TDM 33 96 64 channels e TDM 65 128 64 channels Supported TDM Reference MADI Reference combinations TDM MADI Any of the supported DARS Ref Same as TDM Ref DARS Ref Rates Any of the supported DARS Ref Any of the supported DARS Ref Rates can be Rates unrelated and asynchronous to TDM DARS Ref Any of the supported DARS Ref Any of the supported Video Ref Standards Rates Any of the supported Video Ref Same as TDM Ref Video Ref Standards 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 182 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Multichannel Audio Digital Interface MADI Modules TDM MADI Any of the supported Video Ref Standards any of the supported DARS Ref
118. and parameters suffixed with 2 refer to PX RES 2 Both PX RES modules use the same IP addresses However the Ethernet ports of the standby PX RES are disconnected internally to avoid address collision with the active PX RES 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 40 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Resource Module PX RES 4 Select Yes against Save Parameters and Faults view Parameters Faults 4 IP3 Frame MAC Address 1 IP Address 1 02 90 F9 00 65 A8 10 10 20 120 Frame PX RES IP Mask 1 Gateway Address 1 Video Crosspoint 255 255 255 0 10 10 20 120 TDM Crosspoint Save MAC Address 2 Sync z No 02 90 F9 00 65 A9 Power Supplies Ethernet Ports IP Address 2 IP Mask 2 Serial Ports 10 10 30 120 255 255 255 0 Module Upgrade Gateway Address 2 Save 10 10 30 120 No Controller Front Ethernet Ports There is an Ethernet port on the front of each Resource Module PX RES This Ethernet port can be used for configuring each Resource Module The default hard coded IP addresses are as follows Table 13 Front Ethernet Ports PX RES 1 Primary IP Address 1 169 254 3 126 IP Mask 1 255 255 255 0 Gateway Address 1 169 254 3 1 PX RES 2 Secondary Redundant IP Address 2 169 254 3 127 IP Mask 2 255 255 255 0 Gateway Address 2 169 254 3 1 Sync Ports Each PX CBP module includes four looping sync inputs Each s
119. arameters e e 57 PX AEARM DATA Parameter siicccicacccessccavecstosnacesaseaduescossevand aE EEEE EENKEER EVESEK EEN 57 PX ALARM ATDM Parameters rete aipear ai e aE AKE EAE RRE 58 LED gll ee 59 Status and Alarm LEDS E 59 Failsafe Upgraden i o Ee REN e E RRY ERREUR ee 60 POWEF CONSUMPTION E TE 60 Video Crosspoint Module PX 5 76x1024 3G sccccsiaisssscssiccssacaicvsacseicessesaieesncsaicneacs 61 Video Crosspoint Module PX 576x1024 3G Overview c cccesscesssecssseecsseeecsaeeessaeessseecseeessaeeseneeesees 61 Video Crosspoint Module PX 576x1024 3G Location intbhetrame sees 62 Extracting the Video Crosspoint from the Frame 63 Putting the Video Crosspoint back into the Frame 65 Video Crosspoint Module Parameters sess en te rnnn nasse nennen nans ases nean 66 LED Indicators on Video Crosspoint Module 67 Fuses on Video Crosspoint Module 68 Power Consumption isisisi senten ea earar a aues SER EE tee ee Ee EE aes DR ee 68 Audio TDM Crosspoint Module PX ATDM64 X28 sees 69 jl m 69 Audio TDM Crosspoint Module PX ATDM64 X28 Location in the IP3 Frame 70 Fuses on the DN ATDMGA NIR 71 DIP Switches on the PX ATDM64 X28 cesses eene en nnns sten tens seen ness seen renis entes nnnss 72 Fans on the TDM Audio Crosspoint Module PX ATDM64 X28 sess
120. ard detected on RO e Unknown the genlock input e 525i 59 94 e 625i 50 e 720p 25 e 720p 29 97 e 720p 30 e 720p 50 e 720p 59 94 e 720p 60 e 1080p 23 98 e 1080p 24 e 1080p 29 97 e 1080p 30 e 1080p 25 e 1080i 50 e 1080i 59 94 e 1080i 60 e 1080sF 23 98 e 1080sF 24 Processed Outputs Video Name Description Type Options Processed SDI Video Standard Displays the SDI video RO e Unknown Outputs signal standard e 525i 59 94 Video e 625i50 e 720p 25 e 720p 29 97 e 720p 30 e 720p 50 e 720p 59 94 e 720p 60 e 1080p 23 98 e 1080p 24 e 1080p 29 97 e 1080p 30 e 1080p 25 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 147 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer Demultiplexer Modules Name Description Type Options e 1080i 50 e 1080i 59 94 e 1080i 60 e 1080p 50 e 1080p 59 94 e 1080p 60 e 1080p 50DL e 1080p 59 94 DL e 1080p 60 DL e 1080sF 23 98 e 1080sF 24 e ASI Signal Presence 1 8 Indicates presence of RO e Yes SDI or ASI signal ASI e No signals will automatically bypass all processing stages EDH Present Reports the presence of RO e Yes EDH in the input SDI e No CRC EDH Error Counter Reports the number of RW e No chrominance CRC EDH e Yes errors that have occurred CRC EDH Error Clear Clears all CRC EDH error RW e No counter
121. are not compatible with Platinum frames The frame has a passive module interconnect MI signal distribution module interconnecting the routing system The frame is accessible from the front via sectioned removable doors Status LEDs can be viewed through these doors these LEDs indicate power supply presence and status resource module usage and link light indicators for Ethernet communications ports Four 1500 watt power supplies are present Frames with conversion or advanced processing options may require additional power supplies or additional power supplies may be added for redundancy Status LEDs on Power Supply units Resource cards and various I O modules are visible when the door is open Alarms on various modules are reported to the Platinum IP3 Controller to ease hardware management of the system The Platinum IP3 frame is designed to be compliant with NEBS certification requirements for example module retention doors non removable door option locking power supplies etc The frame is compatible with router control software products such as Magellan CCS Navigator and can also be controlled via a web based Controller Platinum IP3 Architecture The Platinum IP3 s flexible modular architecture accommodates standard definition high definition and 1080p digital video signals while keeping a versatile frame and control system This combination allows high performance multi format video audio and embedded audio routing within
122. ary and Confidential February 2015 Page 43 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Resource Module PX RES There are nine LEDs behind the Card edge Ejector handle All of these LEDs should be ON when the POWER LED is ON If any one of them is OFF it indicates a problem with a power circuit on the module L GND_TPS 8 S054 i LER DIS opp ivo oy a op D4 1 9V a IS v 03 tow oe gt s v DSP log d L Q59 tog D14 FPLL_2V5 on E w Q60 BT D26 3 8 061 1 2V_SWCORE D12 FcoRE 1V2 D13 FDRAM_1V8 MAX PWR 15W Figure 13 Fuses on the PX RES Resource Module Fuses on the PX RES Resource Module Fuse Name Fuse Type Fuse Rating Part Number F1 Slowblow 2 Amps 127 100001000 F2 Slowblow 2 Amps 127 100001000 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 44 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Resource Module PX RES Fuse Name Fuse Type Fuse Rating Part Number F3 Slowblow 2 Amps 127 100001000 DIP Switches WILL LO SN 521232 170 100453Q00 A01 d RESET Ke r SW4 m FAILSAFE BOOT SHORT PINS 1 amp 2 ai a out B e The RESET push button is a system reset e On SW4 pins 1 and 2 are used to force the module to failsafe boot XY Ports Note The two XY ports on the rear of the Platinum IP3 frame are not used or suppo
123. ase No phase error Phase error Clip Detect 1 32 RO Reports if signal on the input e Signal OK Table Parameter exceeds the maximum input e Signal clipping amplitude Bypass 1 16 For signals routed to wideband e On Table Parameter xpt only tells control to make off switch regardless of signal presence Swap Copy 1 16 Swap Copy left and right audio e No swap Table Parameter channels NOTE This parameter is always applied after summing Swap left and right Copy left to right e Copy right to left 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 212 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual AES Balanced Coaxial Modules with TDM Capability Parameter Description Options Level Adjust 1 32 Indicates gain attenuation 10 dB to 30 dB in 0 5 dB Table Parameter applied to mono channel increments Summing 1 16 Add left and right audio e No summing Table Parameter samples divide by 2 e Right to left NOTE This parameter is e Left to right always applied before e Both swap copy Out Crosspoint Type Determines crosspoint matrix e TDM XPT requirement e Wideband e Both TDM and wideband e Undefined Parameters and Faults View Parameters Faults 4 PT AEST IB Ge Show Table 1 In Polarity Reversal Out Show Table No Signal Presence Show Table Phase Alarm Show Table Clip Detect Show
124. at channel is illuminated If the signal level falls below the minimum threshold for a user defined time duration the sampled data output from the A D converter will be overwritten by all zeroes within the FPGA This greatly reduces idle channel noise in systems using A D and D A converters Conversely the detection of a signal above the minimum threshold value also has an associated time duration before muting is released providing hysteresis to this function e The second implementation of analog level detection is performed in the A D converter When the analog level exceeds the digital full scale capability of the converter the red Clipping LED for that channel is illuminated and the condition is reported to the control system The user has the option of defining whether this condition constitutes an alarm Installation All input modules and back panels are installed at our manufacturing facility If you need to purchase additional components please contact your dealer or our Sales Department Control This Module s parameters can be enabled and or changed via CCS Navigator or the Platinum IP3 Controller Controllable Parameters Table 87 PT ADCT IB User Controllable Parameters Parameter Description Options Module External Reference Frequency Reports external reference e Unlocked RO frequency e Out of Range NOTE Must be a sample rate e 192 kHz supported by TDM e 96 kHz e 88 2 kHz e 48 kHz e 44 1 kHz e 3
125. ations for monitoring added at slot 1 and slot 2 ports 1 8 respectively Selected View IP3 Database Save Validate Resync More stinations Undo Redo Add Insert Update Remove HD Video HD Video HD Video HD Video HD Video HD Video HD Video HD Video HD Video OM 10 HD Video OM 11 HD Video OM 12 HD Video OM 13 HD Video OM 14 HD Video OM 15 HD Video OM 16 HD Video Save and Validate Database Matrix 1 Click Save to save the database matrix 2 Click Validate to validate it there should be no errors IP3 Routing System Configuration Database Editor Selected View IP3 Database Destinations HD Video HD Video 3 Click the X at the top to close Open the DBEditor window under Control Views More Insert Update Remove IP3 B OUT Slot 1 Port 1 IP3 B OUT Slot 1 Port 2 5 Click Publish to send the Database configuration to the IP3 Controller Click Start Transfer Route Outputs 1 Launch and log in to the Router Soft Panel by going to http lt IPAddress gt panel 2 To monitor a router Destination 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 241 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Output Monitoring Modules Route any of the Destinations created in Add Monitoring Router Destinations on page 240 from the source list to one of the monitoring outputs created in Add PX HSRAEC OM Destinations on page 238 You can monitor Route
126. be inserted into or extracted from a IP3 frame while the frame is powered and functioning The system Controller will recognize the addition or removal of an Output Module from any of the Output Module slots and will update the change automatically When the Controller recognizes the addition of an Output Module it allows the user to control the additional inputs to the matrix When inserted into the IP3 frame each Output Module mates with a passive connector assembly back module mounted in the rear of the frame This assembly allows a high integrity interconnect between the input cables and the input module without requiring any active components Frames that are not fully populated with modules when shipped from the factory contain blank covers over the non populated slots If an Output Module is added to the frame at a future time the blank cover must be replaced with the corresponding back module Note IP3 modules can be damaged if they are plugged into the wrong back modules or wrong slot Care should be exercised when plugging modules into the frame Failsafe Mode To put an Output Module in Failsafe Mode 1 Unplug the board 2 Setthe Failsafe jumper 3 Wait 10 seconds 4 Insert the board again The above procedure applies to the following Output Modules e PX HSR16C OBG Output Module e PX HSR160 OBG Output Module e PX HSR8C2DS OBG Output Module e PX HSR8O2DS OBG Output Module 2015 Imagine Communications Corp P
127. bruary 2015 Page 87 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Input Modules PX IB Name Description Type Options Signal Input Range In normal operation input EQ is set Normal 800mVpp to compensate cable loss where at Small 400mVpp the other end of the cable the driver outputs 800mVpp If a passive splitter is present on the input side of the module set this to Small 400mVpp EQ Power Save Puts equalizer into power save RW Auto Default Mode mode Disable Force Parameters and Faults Parameters Faults Back To Parameters 4 PX HSR9C1D IBG Genera Inputs PX HSR9C1D IBG Inputs ne LEE 0 Enable CRC EDH Error Fields 0 Enable v 0 i a CRC Counter Control o Enable 0 0 0 EDH Presence 0 Enable N A Input EDH Error N A Signal Input Range Normal 800mVpp EQ Power Save Mode Auto EDH Counter Control Enable CRC EDH Error Clear Figure 38 Inputs Parameters 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 88 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Input Modules PX IB Advanced Parameters Advanced Parameters are accessed by clicking the Advanced option in the parameter menu list Parameters and Faults view Parameters Faults 4 PX HSRSCID IBG Inputs Table 40 Input Modules Advanced Parameters Name Description Type Options Parameter Hysteresis Sets hyst
128. c Equipment WEEE Compliance esee 16 WOR rte E 17 Platinum IP3 OVERVIEW E 17 Product Description EEN 17 FeatUlE ERR 17 Platinum IP3 Frame DN ER 281 18 Platinum IPS ArchlteCture caede deae donent cu eege gen a degna i o aaa S 18 Removing thE Frame DOOF s cote acento aec veio raconte eege 19 Frame ge d E EN Platinum Us Front VIEW eege geed EeEN EN Platinum IP3 Rear VIew acce eerte eicere trc e eese te eee ster e AENEAS EIEEE ANEETA E 22 Platinum IP3 Frame ArchitectUre erri e aee een eene eda eee ena d e e nage ee niece Mena Rapide 23 Platinum IP3 Physical Specifications eese eese nhnn nnne th anser than nn aas 24 Frame Specific Components ssseessssrorssseissnssrissseessisssnsrrsissnsrrsi sses risona r seivS norr S SESSE NSE SpPEN arrasin assa 25 Modules in the Frame by Function 0 ccccccsseceesssececssssececssssececeessececsesseceeseaaesecseaaeeeesesaeeeeseaaeeeeseaaes 26 Frame Specifications exten ette eee Teen etre esee depu donee n aeq deeg 27 Power CONSUMPTION OE m o eaaa E a Aeee o E eA va des ead dee 27 Power Consumption of Frame and Input Output Modules seen 27 Video Matrix EXPANSION ETE ILL 29 Output Vu Log A e E De EE 29 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 3 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Content
129. ce signal Yes 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 186 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Multichannel Audio Digital Interface MADI Modules Path Parameter Name Description Options MADI Reference Standard RO Indicates the reference Unknown standard detected on the 525j 59 94 genlock input 625i 50 ME c de be 720p 25 marked with an asteris can be detected but they E cannot be used in ZC RN connection with the PT 20p 50 MADIxx OBG since the 720p 59 94 output sample rate is 720p 60 always 48kHz 1080p 23 98 1080p 24 1080p 29 97 1080p 30 1080p 25 1080i 50 1080i 59 94 1080i 60 1080sF 23 98 1080sF 24 DARS 192kHz DARS 96kHz DARS 88 2kHz DARS 48kHz DARS 44 1kHz DARS 32kHz TDM Input TDM Audio Format x128 RO Indicates the format of PCM Table Parameter each of the 128 Audio Non PCM mono channels received Dolby E by the TDM Receiver Dolby D TDM Audio Present x128 RO Indicates the presence of No Table Parameter each of the 128 Audio Yes mono channels received by the TDM Receiver 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 187 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Multichannel Audio Digital Interface MADI Modules Path Parameter Name Description Options MADI Output MADI Output Format x4 Selects which portion of TDM 1 56
130. conds after power cycling a board is ready to detect input signals but it outputs a 75 color bar test pattern of the same video standard as the detected input signal until the PT Resource card has completed uploading the previously used configuration parameters The readiness of the board is reflected by the read only Control Status parameter See Table General gt Control Status for details Firmware Upgrade and Backup Image The PT FSDMX IBG PT FSDMXO IBG modules maintain a backup image of the last working firmware at all times In the event of an upgrade failure the module will revert back to its backup image to maintain operation on the board You can verify the version that is current running on the module by looking at the version parameters Software Version Control FPGA Version and Processing FPGA Version Upgrading the firmware on PT FSDMX IBG and PT FSDMXO IBG modules takes approximately 50 minutes Multiple identical boards can be upgraded at once in batches of up to 16 boards one zone A batch upgrade takes about as long as upgrading a single board Always wait for the Firmware upgrade successful message before power cycling the system exchanging boards or carrying out any other maintenance work that could interfere with the upgrade 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 112 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer De
131. control signals I2C and Alarm from the External Power Supply Frame PX FR EXPS to the Power Distribution modules PX PD TOP and PX PD BOTTOM Two Power Adapter boards are assembled into the AC DC Rear Panel There are four AC DC Rear Panels assembled to the IP3 frame two at the top and two at the bottom The Power Adapter module contains fuses and Transient Voltage Suppressors TVS diodes for over current and Transient Voltage protection respectively Besides these components the Power Adapter module is passive Eight Power Adapter modules are installed in the frame so that two PX FR EXPS frames can be connected to the IP3 frame for power redundancy When the IP3 frame is shipped plastic covers are placed over the Combo D sub miniature Dsub connector to protect the pins from damage The plastic covers should only be removed if the PX FR EXPS is connected to the IP3 frame 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 290 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Power Adapter Module PX PWR ADPTR WARNING 24V and 5V are exposed on D sub connectors Keep plastic covers on when not used for connection to PX FR EXPS to avoid accidental shorting that could disturb the IP3 system LT 9avo A Egg006 YPE Figure 146 PX PWR ADPTR Module WARNING This module is not hot pluggable The Frame must be powered down if you need to remove this module Fuses on the Power Adapter P
132. cordance with this EU Directive companies selling electric or electronic devices in the EU will affix labels indicating that such products must be properly recycled See our website for more information Contact your local sales representative for information on returning these products for recycling Equipment that complies with the EU directive will be marked with a WEEE compliant emblem Figure 1 WEEE Compliance Emblem 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 16 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Introduction Introduction Platinum IP3 Overview The Platinum IP3 Intelligent Signal Routing System provides unprecedented scalability and flexibility to designers of new broadcast facilities OB production vehicles and other television switching monitoring and transmission facilities worldwide The Platinum IP3 features enhanced crosspoint and switching architectures which allow scalability to extremely large systems coupled with a new frame design for improved density and reliability in large system configurations Product Description The Platinum IP3 routing switcher system extends both the matrix size and functionality of our routing switcher product line Its flexible modular architecture accommodates standard definition high definition and 1080p digital video signals while keeping a versatile frame and control system This combination allows high performance mul
133. ction e Enabled Lowpass Filter 1 8 e Disabled Chrominance Notch Filter Color notch filter selection e Disabled Select 1 8 e Notch 1 Table Parameter e Notch 2 e Notch 3 Bypass 1 8 Bypasses Platinum auto e No Table Parameter crosspoint mute if signal is not e yes present 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 228 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Analog Composite Video Modules Parameters and Faults Parameters Faults 4 PT DEC IB Signal Presence medals Show Table In Video Standard Show Table Pedestal Enable Show Table Luminance Filter Type Show Table Brightness Show Table Contrast Show Table Figure 101 PT DEC IB Parameters 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 229 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Functional Block Diagram YIC decoder Input 1 Input 2X gt 10 bit deci ADC mation filter Notch filter Y Low pass Sc filter Y al DI adaptive Notch comb filter U filter Band pass filter C Notch filter V data bus 10 bit Analog Composite Video Modules Y peaking Brightness contrast saturation adjust sl DD Output 1A serializer y Output 1B 1 4fsc amp 27 MHz PLLs 27 MHz clock gt Output 2A gt O
134. ctional Type Input Module Output Module PX HSR901D IBG 9 channel SD HD 3G digital video input module with 9 optical connectors and DS PX HSR8C2DS OBG 8 channel digital video SD HD 3G output module HDBNC output connectors plus DS in and out for system expansion Rear Connectors Output Rear Connectors Table 8 Output Rear Connectors Module Description PX HSR16C OBP 16 HDBNC SD HD 3G output back panel PX HSR8C2DS OBP 8 HDBNC 2 DensiShield SD HD 3G output back panel Input Rear Connectors Table 9 Input Rear Connectors Module Description PX HSR9C IBP 9 HDBNC SD HD 3G input back panel PX HSR9C1D IBP 9 HDBNC 1 HDBNC output SD HD 3G Matrix Expansion back panel Expansion Modules The Platinum IP3 frame supports expansion modules to provide TDM and Data Fabric interconnect with a second frame when operating in expansion mode Expansion is achieved using output modules There must be corresponding output cards in the primary and expansion frames for inputs to be accessible For cost effective input expansion expansion only output back modules are available The Expansion module serves as the physical interface to the DensiShield cable for TDM expansion It also provides RJ 45 Jacks for GigE interfacing The Expansion Module plugs in to the bottom two slots formerly used for output monitoring in the Platinum frame Crosspoint Modules Th
135. d The back module has to be mounted onto the Platinum frame and the Front Module detaches from the Back Module when the Front Module is pulled out from the frame 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 179 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Multichannel Audio Digital Interface MADI Modules The PT MADI40 OBG comes pre fitted with one MADI compliant Dual Tx SFP module See Specifications see PT MADI4C OBG Specifications on page 183 for details T H EEN zl PT SFP2X4 BM 161 001103Q00 REVA T4083 N 5211 CIT ELLE LLL e Figure 81 PT MADI40 OBG Back Module 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 180 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Multichannel Audio Digital Interface MADI Modules Controlling the MADI Output Module through the Controller You can access and control PT MADI4x OBG parameters through the Controller by selecting it in the list of Output Modules and then clicking Open Module View List Faults Open Module Open Module Reference Locking Reference locking is controlled by the following parameters e TDM Reference Source in the TDM Locking category options are Sync1 Sync2 or Sync3 e MADI Reference source in the MADI Locking category options are Sync1 Sync2 Sync3 or Same as TDM Ref By default audio encapsulated into the MADI
136. de Table 111 PX HSRAEC OM LED Indicators EXT IN 1 Signal Presence Active signal on this input green EXT IN 2 Signal Presence Active signal on this input green EXT IN 3 Signal Presence Active signal on this input green EXT IN 4 Signal Presence Active signal on this input green 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 243 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Output Monitoring Modules POWER Power Supply Indicator 24V power rails are operational CTRL Active Control e Initializes red e Turns green when the FPGA has configured and the control system is communicating with the card e Flashes amber if there is an alarm condition on this card Controllable Parameters The PX HSRAEC OM module can be controlled via the Controller and is displayed in the Control Cards category When you access a module by clicking on it in the list of modules its parameters are displayed The total number of modules of that type in the frame is also displayed on the left PX HSRAEC OM Module Faults 0 Major O Minor p Close PX HSRAEC OM Modules Parameters and Faults PX HSRAEC OM in Slot 6 View Parameters Faults PX HSRAEC OM in Slot 7 4 PX HSRAEC OM Power Good Good Module SDI In Sync Select Audio Sync 1 Parameters Name Description Type Options General Module Status Displays current status RO e Module Ready of the module e Firmware Upgrade Requi
137. de is maintained before muting occurs is also user defined The PM ADCT IB PT ADCT IB can automatically detect an external AES reference signal DARS to derive the required sampling clocks and generate AES streams that are locked in both frequency and phase to this external reference signal When this reference signal is absent the PM ADCT IB PT ADCT IB generates the necessary sampling clocks at one of several of the most common AES frame rates Users will have the ability to adjust these internally generated sampling clock frequencies within a specified tolerance 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 189 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Analog Digital Audio Converter Modules with TDM Back Panel I O Module for PM ADCT IB PT ADCT IB The PT A2 BP back panel I O module corresponds to the PM ADCT IB and PT ADCT IB modules DB 44 connectors are used on the PT A2 BP The optional PT A2 DTB terminal block adapter is available to accommodate wiring of individual signals to the frame Figure 83 PT A2 DTB Terminal Block Adapter Analog Inputs The PM ADCT IB PT ADCT IB provides 16 dual channel balanced analog audio inputs via the PT A2 BP back module The standard option provides high impedance inputs optional 600 terminated inputs are also available Input signals are received by high quality audio line receivers containing internal laser trimmed matched resistors for ma
138. deo delay Additionally up to three seconds of delay can be added through the Audio Channel Delay parameter PT FSDMX IBG Controllable Parameters The PT FSDMX IBG Module can be controlled via the Controller When you access a PT FSDMX IBG module by clicking on it in the list of modules its parameters are displayed The total number of PT FSDMX IBG modules in the frame is also displayed on the left PT FSDX8C1D IBG Module Faults PT FSDX8C1D IBG Modules Parameters and Faults PT FSDX8C1D IBG View Parameters Faute PT FSDX8C1D 1BG PT FSDX8CLD IBG 4 T FSDX8CID IBG PT FSDX8CLD IBG General PT FSDX8CLD IBG Genlock License Key Senal Number 0123456789 PT FSDX8CLD IBG gt Input 4 G906504DUGRUK gt Processing Version Licensed Options Frame Sync Total number of Temperature PT FSDX8C1D modules in frame Fan Status Show Table FPGA 1 DDR Status The following are user controllable parameters for PT FSDMX IBG PT FSDMXO IBG e General Parameters on page 116 e Genlock Parameters on page 118 e Input Parameters on page 119 e Processing Parameters on page 121 General Parameters Table 63 PT FSDMX IBG General Parameters Name Description Type Options Serial Number Displays the module s RO lt String gt unique identifier License Key Activates the Frame RW lt String gt Sync option Licensed Options Displays activated RO e None options e Frame Sync 2015 Imagine
139. disconnect the USB cable from the ATDM Crosspoint 8 Re attach to verify the files were transferred and saved correctly by checking the file sizes match the file sizes on the host Power Consumption Table 35 PX ATDM64 X28 Power Consumption 24V Power Rail 55W 5V Power Rail 0 8W Total Power 55 8W 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 79 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Input Modules PX IB Input Modules PX IB PX IB Input Module General Overview The PX IB is a generic Video Input Module designed for the IP3 Frame It supports signals up to 3 Gbps The PX IB Input Module accepts digital video signals equalizes and retimes data streams detects standards and formats and distributes signals to the MI backplane to be switched by the crosspoint matrix PX IB input modules are hot swappable The PX IB accepts an input data stream for each of the nine channels Cable losses are automatically compensated for if the cable length is within the maximum length limitation The maximum cable length is a system specification not solely dependent on the input card It is measured by bit error limitation not jitter Figure 35 PX IB Generic Output Module PX IB Input Options The PX IB is designed in front module plus back module structure A single common front module FM combines with different back modules to provide several IO variation
140. dule 103 Power ConsumbptiOEDi s coeunt ee eae tae sed eque reuse te ret eget EEN ugar Fue TER oio a Eee eiu 103 PX HSR9O IBG Input Oe e EE 103 Power CONSUMPTION nse ose totes sese sue etes ne see eEEE ARENS edades a ONERE condense tuted 104 PX HSR9C IBG PX HSR9O IBG Parametric Control 104 PX HSR9C1D IBG Input Module 104 Power Consummptlon eier Ee SEE de KAREN RER cols e RES AEN RER AER SES de NEEN rdv dde rad RU Va sve 105 PX HSR9O1D IBG Input Module essen eee ener inni ness nnns enne seen nnns 105 Power ConsumlpblOTn cesses serre et EFFI FRE rt oe eb esu a E EEE AREE 105 PX HSR16C OBG Output Module cccccsssscececeesessnececeeecesseaaeeeeeeusessesauaecesecsseesesasaecesecesseseaeaeeeeeens 106 Power ConsumpltiO FE douce eatem Petco eese doter dunes ees eene Ee ee dudo 106 PX HSR160 OBG Output Module 106 eigener ER 107 PX HSR16C OBG PX HSR160 OBG IBG Parametric Control 107 PX HSR802DS OBG Output MOQUl ccd ret Tree reete ie ens dee A t oai du Tuv dee 107 Power CONSUMPTION RR HRR u u ebe 108 PX HSR8C2DS OBG Output Module 108 PX HSR8C2DS OBG PX HSR802DS OBG Parametric Control 109 Power COnsumptblOT EE 109 Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer Demultiplexer Modules 110 el 110 PT FSDMX IBG PT FSDMXO IBG Frame Synchronizer and Demultiplexing Input Modules 111 QA
141. e by clicking on it in the list of Output Modules its parameters are displayed The total number of PX HSR16C OBG PX HSR160 OBG modules in the frame is also displayed on the left PX HSR16C OBG Module Faults Qe Close PX HSR16C OBG Modules ers and Faults PX HSR16C OBG View Parameters 4 PX HSRL6C OBG Output Outputs PX HSR16C OBG Outouts Total number of Advanced PX HSR16C OBG Autobypass Yes modules in frame Mute Output Enabled Enforced Slew Rate SD Lock Detect PX HSR802DS OBG Output Module The PX HSR802DS OBG is a 16 channel SD HD 3G Digital Video Output Module m OUT 1 2 OUT 3 4 OUT 5 6 OUT 7 8 P OUT 9 16 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 107 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Digital Video Modules Figure 48 PX HSR802DS OBG Figure 49 PX HSR802DS OBG The PX HSR802DS OBG has 4 SFP connectors mounted on the metal back panel of the back module each containing 2 channels There are 2 DensiShield ports on the module one of them accepts up to 8 electrical inputs and the other can output op to 8 electrical outputs The DensiShield ports are intended for expansion The PX HSR802DS OBG interfaces with the PX OB Output Module to output up to 16 outputs 8 optical and 8 optical electrical See Output Modules PX OB see Input Modules PX IB on page 80 for details on the PX OB Output module Power Consumpti
142. e 8 physical ports as the processed ones but the actual video channel is Video 2 After inserting unprocessed destinations the location for each video channel on them needs to be manually changed to use Video 2 channel instead of Video 1 So 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 164 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer Demultiplexer Modules create just 1 destination defined as Video 2 and then add the remaining 7 which inherit the Video 2 definition Use the HD Video device type to add a logical destination Enter 1 for the number of Destinations to create Ensure the Slot number corresponds to the Slot that contains your HSR module Change the Name prefix to clearly identify these as Unprocessed outputs for example UnprocX Select Port 1 in the Port drop down Ensure the Index is set to 1 9 Oncecreated double click this in the lower pane and change from Video 1 to Video 2 10 Click the Add button again to add 7 more sources ensure you start at Port 2 11 This completes the definition for the 8 processed and 8 unprocessed outputs 12 Check that the unprocessed output entries have been properly created IP3 Routing System Configuration wb Database Editor Main Database Sources Destinations Redo Add Insert HD Video new ocation Update Save Validate TP3 Test Bernard Slot 20 Port 5 TP3 Test Bernard Slot
143. e Platinum IP3 provides redundant crosspoint paths By using redundant crosspoint modules a fully redundant path through the system is available See Crosspoint Modules on page 34 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 34 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Modules The Platinum IP3 uses unique Video and Audio Crosspoint modules which are not compatible with Platinum frames Table 10 Crosspoint Modules Module Description PX 576X1024 3G Video Crosspoint Module See Video Crosspoint Module PX 576x1024 3G on page 61 PX ATDM64 X28 TDM Audio Crosspoint Module See Audio TDM Crosspoint Module PX ATDM64 X28 on page 69 Monitoring Modules Output Monitoring Modules The Platinum IP3 router supports one optional Output Monitoring module Table 11 Output Monitoring Modules Module Description PX HSRAEC OM Output Monitoring Module See PX HSRAEC OM Output Monitoring Module on page 237 Multiviewer Modules Table 12 Multiviewer Modules Module Description HV SXP 16x3 Single slot Platinum SX Pro with 16 input channels three HDMI outputs and three SDI outputs HV SXP 16x3 O Single slot Platinum SX Pro with 16 input channels three SDI outputs and three fiber optical SDI outputs HV SXP 32x6 Two slot Platinum SX Pro with 32 input channels and HDMI outputs and six SDI outputs HV SXP
144. e Sync 2 reference e Sync3 e Sync 4 In Signal Presence 1 8 RO Reports presence or absence e Signal absent Table Parameter of valid input signal e Signal present 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 227 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Analog Composite Video Modules Parameter Description Options Video Standard 1 8 Sets video standard e Auto Table Parameter e NTSC e PALB e PALM e Combination PAL N e NTSC 4 43 e SECAM e PAL 60 Pedestal Enable 1 8 When Enabled removes 7 5 e Enabled Table Parameter IRE video setup level when e Disabled Disabled leaves the incoming signal level as is Luminance Filter Type 1 8 Table Parameter Enables or disables luminance adaptive comb filter type e Luminance adaptive comb filter enabled e Trap filter enabled e Both filters disabled Brightness 1 8 Sets brightness level 0 255 128 Table Parameter Contrast 1 8 Sets contrast level 0 255 128 Table Parameter Chrominance Saturation 1 8 Sets chrominance saturation 0 255 128 Table Parameter level Chrominance Hue tint 1 8 Table Parameter Sets chrominance hue level 180 to 180 0 Chrominance Adaptive Comb Enables chrominance adaptive e Enabled Filter 1 8 comb filter e Disabled Table Parameter Wideband Chrominance Color lowpass filter sele
145. e if the active PX RES is removed or in case of manual failover e f two PX RES modules are inserted into a frame and powered up at the same time the PX RES in the top slot will have higher priority Sync Notes There are 4 available sync references that can each be turned on or off by Sync Enable parameters 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 47 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Resource Module PX RES e The Sync Mode parameter set to Auto by default allows for configuration of switching point settings In Auto mode the output switches relative to the detected sync reference assigned to the module e f Sync Mode is set to Standard the Sync Reference parameter can be used to specify the sync standard to use as the reference signal The output switches relative to the specified reference e f Sync Mode is set to Advanced the Sync Pulse Delay parameter can be used to specify where the output switching point is relative to the reference signal The delay is in units of microseconds Parameters and Faults View Parameters Faults Back To Parameters G I 4 1P3 Frame alai Frame IP3 Frame Sync PX RES Video Crosspoint Analog 525 59 94 Analog 52 Sync Reference TDM Crosspoint 52 94 Sync 4 Detected Sync Power Supplies Analog 525 59 94 Ethernet Ports Serial Ports Sync Pulse Delay usec Module Upgrade Controller Sync Enable Yes Sync Mode
146. e is equipped with an Audio TDM Receiver that supports a TDM data rate of 344 Mb s and 128 channels of TDMed audio The following audio functionality is supported per SDI channel e De embedding 4 groups 16 mono channels of Audio prior to the Frame Audio Synchronizer e Sample Rate Conversion with bypass capability on a per stereo pair basis Embedded Audio and TDM Audio e Audio Synchronizer Embedded Audio and TDM Audio e Audio Delay gt 3000ms mono channel e Audio Proc Gain Mute Invert e Audio Sum on a per mono channel basis but based on a predefined list of Sums e Audio Swap on a per mono channel basis but based on a predefined list of Swaps e Audio Test Tone Generator Off 400Hz 2kHz 4kHz e Dolby E Header alignment for Dolby E data received via TDM only 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 138 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer Demultiplexer Modules Embedding 4 groups 16 mono channels of Audio after the Frame Audio Synchronizer Automatic Audio selection from video source embedded audio or associated 16 channels of Audio received via TDM TDM Audio channels if present i e routed from the Audio crosspoint take precedence over channels de embedded from the video source Fixed mapping of Audio channels received via TDM and the eight SDI streams e g TDM1 16 gt SDI1 TDM17 32 gt SD Audio P
147. e of the Horizontal and Vertical rates Table 18 Switch Triggering Reference Types that need to be manually configured 28 720x576 501 Line 6 alias of Analog 625 50 29 960x576 50I Line 6 alias of Analog 625 50 30 720x483 601 Line 10 alias of Analog 525 60 31 720x483 601 1 001 Line 10 alias of Analog 525 60 1 001 32 960x483 601 Line 10 alias of Analog 525 60 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 49 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Resource Module PX RES 33 960x483 601 1 001 Line 10 alias of Analog 525 60 1 001 34 1920x1080 30PsF Line 7 alias of 1080 601 35 1920x1080 30PsF 1 001 Line 7 alias of 1080 59 941 36 1920x1080 25PsF Line 7 alias of 1080 501 Alarms All alarms are off by default except for critical temperature alarms Individual alarms can be turned on or off The following error conditions can trigger an alarm Loss of input or output signal Power supply failure Fan failure or missing front fan modules e Video crosspoint reaching critical temperature PX RES synchronization failure Power Consumption Table 19 PX RES Power Consumption 24V Power Rail 15W 5V Power Rail OW Total Power 15W each Modules in Frame 2 Primary and Redundant Installation All communications back panel modules are installed at Imagine Communications
148. ebruary 2015 Page 250 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual 1500 Watt Power Supply and External Power Supply Frame Figure 108 R 1500 Power Supplies at the top of the IP3 Frame Power Supply3 Optional Optional Power Supply4 Figure 109 R 1500 Power Supplies at the bottom of the IP3 Frame Figure 110 R 1500 Power Supply External Power Supply Frame PX FR EXPS A separate External Power Supply Frame PX FR EXPS is available to provide additional power The external power supply frame contains the following e PX PD TOP power distribution board e 4 adapter boards Note The PX FR EXPS does not come with any Power Supplies These have to be purchased and installed separately See Installing Power Supplies on page 256 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 251 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual 1500 Watt Power Supply and External Power Supply Frame The PX FR EXPS External Power Supply Frame is connected to the PX FR 28 IP3 frame using four DC power cables 165 100036Q00 24 or 165 100037Q00 90 You can have up to 2 External Power Supply frames connected to one IP3 frame and these need to be installed either both above the IP3 Frame or one above and below the Frame this is dependent on the length of the cables 24 or 90 used to connect the PX FR EXPS to the PX FR 28 See External Power Supply Frame PX FR EXPS on page 251 To sim
149. ef CRC Err No Ext Ref Lock Err Yes Ext Ref Validity Err No Ext Ref Conf Err No Ext Ref Biphase Err No Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 195 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Analog Digital Audio Converter Modules with TDM Functional Block Diagram Input Channel 1 Analog Input 1A AES Output 1A Analog Input 1B AES Output 1B Analog Input 2A Input Channel 2 Analog Input 2B Analog Input 7A E Input Channel 7 Analog Input 7B Analog Input 8A Input Channel 16 Analog Input 8B AES Reference Receiver AES Output 8B TDM Output Sync Inputs Power Conversion and Voltage Monitoring Figure 85 PM ADCT IB PT ADCT IB Functional Block Diagram 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 196 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Analog Digital Audio Converter Modules with TDM Pinout Diagram Table 88 PT ADCT IB Pinout Information 5 5 3000000000000000 07 16 30000000000000000 0 16 OoOoooooooooooo Oooooooooooooo 44 31 44 31 Inputs DB 44 Inputs DB 44 Inputs DB 44 Pin Inputs DB 44 1 4 Pin No 5 8 Pin No 9 12 No 13 16 Pin No 1A 15 5A 8 9A 15 13A 8 1A 30 5A 7 9A 30 13A 7 1A Gnd 44 5A 6A 22 9A Gnd 44 13A 14A 22 Gnd Gnd 1B 43 5B 36 9B
150. er of Operations Insert Tone if enabled 1 Polarity Reversal and Level Adjust 2 Sum 3 Swap Copy 4 Mute if enabled Operating with the Frame Sync The frame sync is a licensable option If you do not have the Frame Sync license this feature will not be available To acquire a Frame Sync license contact your Customer Service representative A license can be added for the module using the License Key parameter When operating the Frame Sync in Delay mode the audio embedders are automatically turned off Any ancillary data will be passed unprocessed aside from any video delay If the input video frame rate does not match the genlock frame rate for a channel that channel is automatically placed into Delay Mode This information is reflected in the Frame Sync Status parameter 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 113 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer Demultiplexer Modules Fast Video Switch When input video is switched between two sources while both sources are within vertical blanking use the Fast Switch parameter to enable fast video switching between the sources In this mode output video is not frozen when both sources are within the vertical blanking area when the switch takes place Audio Test Tones The following table describes the frequency and levels of each audio output test tone available as a selection from each
151. eresis for RW O 10000000 2000000 parameters needing it This parameter works as time constant of low pass filter of status reporting to ease CCS communication in case there is a flickering status report It can be changed as required Parameters and Faults View Parameters Faults 4 PX HSRSC1D IBG Parameter Hysteresis us 0 5inc were 2000000 Advanced 000000 Figure 39 Input Modules Advanced Parameters 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 89 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Specifications Technical Specifications Table 41 Input Module Technical Specifications Input Modules PX IB Item Description Input Connector e 75 Ohm BNC per IEC 169 8 e 75 Ohm HD BNC e LC optical e DensiShield Impedance e 75 Ohms BNC HD BNC e 100 Ohms differential DensiShield Signal type e SMPTE 424M SMPTE 292M SMPTE 259M e SMPTE 344M DVB ASI e Most other 1Vpp digital signals 3Mb s to 3 0Gb s Maximum input level e 880mV BNC HD BNC e Optical OdBm typical based on GO2927 2917 Return loss BNC HD BNC e 15dB up to 1 485GHz e gt 10dB 1 485GHz to 2 97GHz Equalization BNC HD BNC e Automatic e 400m Belden 1694A for 270Mb s data rate e 200m Belden 1694A for 1 485Gb s data rate e 150m Belden 1694A for 2 97Gb s data rate Optical input se
152. es or Fan speed not nominal Alarms Alarm PCB to monitor both voltage rails and Cooling Fan and make four status signals available at the Main Connector for Remote Monitoring I2C Serial communications to provide all parameters listed in Table 2 Reference Table 1 for Communications pin assignments R1500 to be configured as Slave device If CLK or DATA lines are pulled to GND or VCC power supply operation must not be affected MTBF gt 250 000 Hours 30 Degrees Celsius Excludes Fan Life Power Supply LED Operation Figure 119 LEDs on PX PS Table 115 Power Supply LED Operation LED Behavior Condition 5V OFF No AC power supplied to the power supply Solid AMBER or AC power supplied to the power supply but switch off BLUE Solid GREEN 5VDC standby voltage is present and good NOTE Only possible when AC power is supplied and power switch is on Flashing RED at 2 Hz Fault condition on secondary is detected 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 259 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual 1500 Watt Power Supply and External Power Supply Frame LED Behavior Condition 24V1 OFF Power switch is off or AC power is not present 24V2 Solid GREEN Corresponding 24VDC is present and good Flashing RED at 2 Hz Failure condition detected on the corresponding 24VDC output Possible Causes e Corresponding 24VDC outp
153. es and will provide not only a continuous and uninterrupted stream of video it will also handle the transitioning of embedded Audio from one source to another ina quiet manner In order to accomplish that the following conditions must be met e The two video sources that get switched upstream must be of the same data and frame rate They can be asynchronous with respect to each other and with respect to the reference signal that is applied to the board e The channel that is supposed to produce a clean and quiet output must be operated in Frame Sync mode Frame Sync license is required e ADS Clean must be turned on Note ADS Clean ON will wipe out any embedded non PCM audio data such as Dolby E If a quiet audio transition between two sources which contain a mix of PCM and non PCM audio data is desired it is recommended to bring in the non PCM data via TDM 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 140 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer Demultiplexer Modules PX HSRMX OBG Specifications Electrical Output Back Module with 16 HD BNCs tems Siem men E SD SD1 270 Mb s MPTE 292M Format and Image Sample Structure SMPTE274M 1080i 1080psF 1080p SMPTE296M 720p Return Loss gt 15 dB typical from 5 MHz to 1485 MHz HD SDI 3 Gb s SMPTE 424M Format and Image Sample Structure SMPTE 425M Level A SMPTE 372M Retur
154. es up to 75 watts depending on the specific module type and on operating conditions Ensure that the IP3 frame system has a sufficient number of power supplies to meet the demand resulting from the actual number of modules installed PX HSRMX OBG Variants The PX HSRMX OBG Output Frame Sync Module is available in 4 different variants Table 74 PX HSRMX OBG Variants Moe Geen oo PX HSR8CMX8C OBG SD HD 3G Mux Output Module 16 HD BNC Outputs w 16 HD BNC back panel 8 processed 8 unprocessed PX HSR80MX80O OBG SD HD 3G Mux Output Module 16 Optical Outputs w 16 Fiber 8 SFP back panel 8 processed 8 unprocessed PX HSRMX8C2D OBG SD HD 3G Mux Output Module w 8 HD BNC 2 DensiShield back panel 1 Densishield Output for System expansion unprocessed 8 HD BNC Outputs all processed 1 Densishield Input for System expansion 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 134 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer Demultiplexer Modules Mode eem nmn PX HSRMX802D OBG SD HD 3G Mux Output Module w 8 Fiber A SEP 2 DensiShield 8 Optical Outputs all processed back panel 1 Densishield Output for Router Matrix expansion unprocessed 1 Densishield Input for Router Matrix expansion See Specifications see PX HSRMX OBG Specifications on page 141 for individual specifications PX HSRMX OBG Operation Modes There are different
155. es with TDM Capability 2 23 10 23 2 Gnd 11 10 Gnd 11 3 10 11 10 3 9 11 9 3 Gnd 22 11 Gnd 22 4 21 12 21 4 20 12 20 4Gnd 8 12 Gnd 8 5 7 13 7 5 6 13 6 5 Gnd 19 13 Gnd 19 6 18 14 18 6 17 14 17 6 Gnd 14 Gnd 7 4 15 4 7 15 7 Gnd 16 15 Gnd 16 8 15 16 15 8 14 16 14 8 Gnd 2 16 Gnd 2 Spare Gnd 1 Spare Gnd 1 Specifications AES Balanced Digital Audio Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice Table 98 PT AEBT IB with PT AEB IBP for AES Balanced Digital Audio Inputs Item Specification Number of inputs 16 Input type Balanced transformer coupled Input connector DB 25 Impedance 1100 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 215 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual AES Balanced Coaxial Modules with TDM Capability Item Specification Signal type AES3 AES frame rates 32 kHz to 192 kHz Other 40 60 duty cycle digital signals from 2 Mb s to 25 Mb s Input amplitude 0 2 Vpp 7 Vp p Nominal input amplitude 5 Vp p 1V AES Coaxial Digital Audio Table 99 PT AECT IB with PT AEC IBP for AES Coaxial Digital Audio Inputs Item Specification Number of inputs 16 Input type AC coupled Input connector 75Q BNC per IEC 169 8 via adapter Impedance
156. etary and Confidential February 2015 Page 267 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Table 119 Fan LED Indicators PX FRONT FAN and PX REAR FAN Modules LED Name LED Color Description Alarm Level Power Red The 24 VDC power supply is missing Major Green The module is receiving 24 VDC and 5 VDC power None Off No power is present on the Front Fan module Major ACT CTRL Red The module has not communicated with the Resource Major module PX RES for 5 seconds or a power failure has occurred Green The Front Fan module is operating normally and None communicating with the Resource module via the PX ALARM module Off The module has lost standby power and is not communicating Major with the resource module Fans1to6 Green The fan is operating normally Info Flashing Red The fan has failed or is disconnected Major and Green Status LED for individual fan 1 Reset button za ACT XPT inactive 3 W i Module Ka ACT CTRL Active Control Module E Fan Power g Fan Power g ACT CTRL Active Control Module pa ACT XPT Active Crosspoint Module 4 Reset butto EN P Fan failure indication M Ke flashing red and green TC 5 R Figure 127 Front Fan Module LEDs 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 268 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual PX F
157. eter Description Options Transition 1 16 Table Parameter Determines type of transition on a given destination e Quiet switch e V fade e Fade cut e Cut fade e Synchronous switch Duration 1 16 Table Parameter Determines transition length e No duration e Shortest e Short e Medium short e Medium e Medium long e Long e Longest Module Audio Reference Selects AES reference input for source e Sync 4 e Sync 3 e Sync 2 e Sync 1 Parameter Hysteresis Sets hysteresis for parameters needing it 0 to 5 seconds in 500 ns steps Sync Select Selects one of the four sync e Sync4 inputs as the external e Sync 3 reference e Sync2 e Sync 1 OdBFS Setting Sets O dBFS level for digitalto 13 dB to 28 dB in 1 dB analog conversion increments 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 203 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Analog Digital Audio Converter Modules with TDM Parameters and Faults Parameters 4 PT DACT OB Out Show Table Polarity Reversal Show Table Crosspoint Type TDM Lock Detect Show Table Phase Alarm Show Table Clip Detect Show Table Audio Mute Show Table Figure 88 PT DACT OB Parameters 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 204 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Analog Digital Audio
158. f the eight channels will provide standard reporting of signal presence using a card edge mounted LED in each channel for on site troubleshooting and via the frame control system These additional system LEDs are available e Power supply indicator e Control system acknowledgment e Input usage warning Composite Analog Input Processing The PT DEC IB accepts eight 1 Vpp analog NTSC or PAL video signals terminating into 75Q BNC connectors Using the built in automatic AGC or manual gain settings the input signal level can be adjusted 6 dB in each channel to compensate for variances in upstream equipment As well each input 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 225 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Analog Composite Video Modules is back porch clamped to the proper blanking level prior to conversion in the analog to digital converter ADC and offers the ability to handle signals with a luminance pedestal 7 5 IRE Setup Composite Analog to Digital Conversion Once the analog clamping and level processing has taken place each channel of video is presented to a 10 bit analog to digital converter which is phase and frequency locked by an internal PLL Considering that the desired conversion is to component digital on this card the analog to digital converters are 2X oversampling at 27MHz 4 2 2 data rate of 13 5MHz times 2 As a benefit of the 2X oversampling a half
159. f the power supplies RO No have failed or if there is a loss of Yes power redundancy PSU PS Zone Redundancy Power zone can supply sufficient RO No Table Parameter power if half the active supplies fail Yes PSU gt PS Status cone PS Zone The Zone the power supply provides RO None Supply ower to Table p Zone 1 Parameter e Zone 1 powers IO card slots 1 16 Zone 2 and control cards Zone 3 e Zone 2 powers IO card slots 17 32 Zone 4 and control cards e Zone 3 powers IO card slots 33 48 e Zone 4 powers IO card slots 49 62 PS 5VL Failed Reports if the power supply is RO No providing 5VL power Yes PS 24VL Failed Reports if the power supply is RO No providing 24VL power Yes PS Fan Failed Reports if the power supply fan is in RO No working order Yes PS Ambient Temperature Reports the temperature of the air RO 55 125C coming into the PSU Fan PS Secondary Reports the temperature of the air RO 55 125C Temperature coming out of the PSU Fan PS 5VL Current 5V current is being drawn from the RO 0 100Amps power supply PS 24VL Current 24V current is being drawn from the RO 0 100Amps power supply 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 57 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Alarm Expansion Module PX ALARM Category Name Description Type Options Alarm External Alarm Trigger External Alarm Trigger RW L
160. g Keep at least one set of original packaging in the event that a product needs to be returned for service If the original package is not available you can supply your own packaging as long as it meets the following criteria 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 14 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Preface e The packaging must be able to withstand the product s weight e The product must be held rigid within the packaging e There must be at least 2 in 5 cm of space between the product and the container e The corners of the product must be protected Ship products back to us for servicing prepaid and if possible in the original packaging material If the product is still within the warranty period we will return the product prepaid after servicing Safety This manual contains safety precautions and recommendations specific to the IP3 controller product The IP3 controller is rack mountable using rack rails provided with the unit and it is strongly recommended to do so See the specifications section for the electrical current load of the product and connect the redundant power supplies to electrical circuits which are each capable of supplying the full load of the unit The IP3 controller is forced air cooled to prevent marring during handling and transit there are clear plastic coatings which cover the metallic surfaces and obstruct some of the air ventilati
161. g data control packet in the horizontal ancillary data space ADS Append embedding is only valid if the audio group to be embedded does not already exist 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 159 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer Demultiplexer Modules The following figure shows how append embedding will appear in the ancillary data space when there is no previous audio or other data ADS before embedding Other Other Se data SS data ADS after embedding group Figure 62 Append Embedding Mode Adding Group 1 When No Other Data Present Figure 63 When auxiliary data exists in the ancillary data space appended audio appears following that data ADS before embedding Other ADS after embedding group Figure 64 Append Embedding Mode Adding Group 1 When Auxiliary Data Present If you attempt to insert audio into Group 1 when Group 1 audio data already exists in the ancillary data space no audio will be embedded ADS before embedding Pre existin EAV Group 1 ADS after attempting to embed group 1 Pre existin EAV No audio is embedded Figure 65 Append Embedding Mode Adding Group 1 and a Group 1 Already Exists 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 160 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer Demultiplexer
162. ge 276 System LEDs There are also three system indicator LEDs on the front edge of the module Table 37 Module System LEDs LED DESCRIPTION INPUT 1 9 Signal Presence Green Signal Present Slow Flash Valid Signal present but not locked Solid On Valid Signal present and locked POWER bags Power Supply indicator Green 24V power rails are operational ACT CTRL Active Control Red Initializing Solid Green FPGA has configured and the control system is communicating with the card 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 82 Input Modules PX IB Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual LED DESCRIPTION Flashing Green Alarm condition on the card ACT IN E Active Input Warning Yellow Input on card being used by one or more outputs Note PX IB can lock to 270Mbps 1 5Gbps and 3Gbps video SDI signals POWER ACT CTRL ACT IN INPUT 6 INPUT 7 INPUT 8 INPUT 9 9 co GE Ki mj en INPUT 5 w rm co m CET Figure 36 LEDs on PX IB Input Module Controllable Parameters For Input Modules the Controllable Parameters List is a multilevel structure that includes all of the available parameters arranged into the following groupings e Module Root Level Parameters on page 84 e Input Parameters on page 85 e Advanced Parameters on page 89 February 2015
163. gged in Yes PX ALARM ATDM PSE ou e Cose e IP3 F PX ALARM ATDM Modules Parameters and Faults PX ALARM ATDM View parameters Faults 4 PX ALARM ATDM Power Good Frame on TDM Cable Present Show Table Figure 22 PX ALARM ATDM Parameters LED Indicators Status and Alarm LEDs The PX ALARM maintains standard reporting LEDs in addition to the status of alarms All LEDs are visible from the rear of the frame Table 25 Status and Alarm LEDs LED Reference Function D1 GPO 1 turn reds when GPO output condition defined by user is asserted true D2 GPO 2 turns red when GPO output condition defined by user is asserted true D3 GPO 3 turns red when GPO output condition defined by user is asserted true D4 GPO 4 turns red when GPO output condition defined by user is asserted true D5 GPI Input 1 turns red when GPI Input1 is asserted contact closure to ground D6 GPI Input 2 turns red when GPI input 2 is asserted contact closure to ground D7 Power supply Alarm PS ALM turns red when any present power supply s alarm is asserted triggered D8 Fan Alarm FAN ALM turns red when any fans fail D9 Control LED CTRL Initializes red turns green when communication with the Resource card PX RES is working D10 24V Power Supply 24V turns green when either power is present from either Zone 1 or 2 D11 GPI Input 1 turns red when GPI Input 3 is asserted contact cl
164. he Reset button SWC1 or power cycle the board by unplugging plugging the board from the frame Use the Controller s GUI to upgrade the application The following figure shows switch 1 2 3 and 4 in the OFF position This is the setting that should be used for normal operation Make sure the jumpers are restored to this position after performing a failsafe upgrade Switch 2 3 and 4 are reserved for future use ON CEK TOAGA a E TE FE ME JTAG_TAP_MCU Figure 30 DIP Switches on the PX ATDM64 X28 Module 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 72 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Audio TDM Crosspoint Module PX ATDM64 X28 Fans on the TDM Audio Crosspoint Module PX ATDM64 X28 j CT 777 7771 22 PTD Le ber EE Dee J ddd OC d Bate pott Figure 31 Fans on the PX ATDM64 X28 Table 33 PX ATDM64 X28 Fan Components Fan Component Part Number 131 100006Q00 Fan Mounting Screws 4 40 3 16 4 40X3 16 PH Q Fan Connector P9 Fan Blower Fan Connector P12 Instructions to Replace the Fan Blowers Using needle nosed pliers carefully lift the Fan Connector off the board taking care not to twist or bend it Carefully remove the clip that the wire runs through 1 1Remove the wire than runs through the clip 2 2Remove the 2 Phillips mounting screws and gently lift the fan blower off the board
165. holds an optional Redundant Shadow module which shadows all operations of the active module so as to allow it to become active in case the active module is removed or halted due to error The shadow module sets its outputs to a high impedance state until it becomes active but otherwise performs all operations in parallel with the primary crosspoint module Primary and Redundant TDM Audio Crosspoint Modules WI Figure 27 TDM Audio Crosspoint Module in Platinum IP3 frame 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 70 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Audio TDM Crosspoint Module PX ATDM64 X28 Figure 28 PX ATDM64 X28 Audio Crosspoint Module Fuses on the PX ATDM64 X28 Figure 29 Fuses on the PX ATDM64 X28 Table 32 PX ATDM64 X28 Fuses pa Fuse Name Fuse Type Fuse Rating Present on Part Number PSF1 Slowblow 4 Amps 24V power rail 127 100006Q00 FC1 Slowblow 0 75 Amps 5V power rail 127 100004Q00 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 71 Platinum P3 Installation and Operation Manual Audio TDM Crosspoint Module PX ATDM64 X28 DIP Switches on the PX ATDM64 X28 DIP switch SWC2 switch 1 puts the Freescale Kinetis processor into Failsafe mode To enable Failsafe move SWC2 switch 1 to the ON position After you put the board into Failsafe mode push t
166. hosen to provide for many of the most common AES frame rates 32 kHz 44 1 kHz 48 kHz 88 2 kHz 96 kHz and 192 kHz Voltage controlled crystal oscillators or VCXOs allow adjustment of these internally generated sampling clocks within a specified tolerance e n auto mode the PM ADCT IB PT ADCT IB detects whether a usable external reference is present or not If it is able to lock to the reference it will operate as described in External mode however if the reference is lost or becomes unusable the PM ADCT IB PT ADCT IB will automatically switch over to operate as described in Internal Mode If the reference is restored the board will again automatically switch over to operate as described in External Mode 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 191 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Analog Digital Audio Converter Modules with TDM Analog Level Detection Analog input level detection is provided in two forms e The first implementation is through the use of rectifier and comparator circuits that are used to detect a user defined minimum signal amplitude This minimum amplitude is conveyed via a nonvolatile digitally controlled potentiometer that provides the reference voltage to the comparators The reference voltage can be individually set for channels A and B on all inputs If the amplitude of the input signal exceeds the comparator reference voltage the green LED for th
167. ications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 149 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer Demultiplexer Modules Name Description Type Options Fade Rate Fade rate applies to all RW e 0 10s in 1s steps 16 audio channels in a 1 video stream e s Word Length Specifies the audio word RW e 16 bits length for all 16 e 20 bits channels in a video e 24 bits stream See Word Length Parameter on page 157 Dolby E Start Line Ln Determines the Dolby E RW e Range is mode start line specific and complies with Dolby E specification Proc Amp Name Description Type Options P d Y Gain dB Adjusts gain for the Y RW rocesse ain dB justs gain for the 3 0 to 43 0 dB 0 dB Outputs Proc channel in 0 1 dB steps Amp Cb Gain dB Adjusts gain to the Cb RW SE ee 3 0 to 3 0 dB 0 dB color difference in 0 1 dB steps component Cr Gain dB Adjusts gain to the C RW FORI os p 3 0 to 43 0 dB 0 dB color difference i in 0 1 dB steps component Y Offset mV Adjusts offset forthe Y RW SELAMIN ee 100 6 mV 0 mV in channel 0 8 mV increments Cb Offset mV Adjusts offset for the Cb RW SEO E 100 6 mV 0 mV in channel f 0 8 mV increments Cr Offset mV Adjusts offset for the Cr RW r Offset mV justs offset for the Cr 100 6 mV 0 mV in channel 0 8 mV increments White Clip Enabl i DESEE EPIS Cont
168. ications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 67 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Video Crosspoint Module PX 576x1024 3G Fuses on Video Crosspoint Module vuv w Figure 26 Fuses on the Video Crosspoint Module Table 30 Fuses on the Video Crosspoint Module Fuse Name Fuse Type Fuse Rating Part Number FCS Slowblow 750 mA 127 100004Q00 Power Consumption Table 31 PX 576x1024 3G Power Consumption 24V Power Rail 236W 5V Power Rail 0 1W Total Power 236 1W Modules in Frame 2 Primary and Redundant 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 68 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Audio TDM Crosspoint Module PX ATDM64 X28 Audio TDM Crosspoint Module PX ATDM64 X28 Overview The PX ATDM64 X28 Audio TDM Crosspoint ATDM module routes switches audio signals from Input modules to Output modules via a proprietary time division multiplexed TDM transport scheme The Audio TDM Crosspoint module supports different types of audio transitions when switching from one audio source to another Transition types such as Quiet switching V fade fade cut cut fade and synchronous switching The cut associated with the fade cut and cut fade transitions are minimum duration fades to eliminate audible switching artifacts It also allows for certain audio effects for a given destination P
169. icrosoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation All other trademarks and trade names are the property of their respective companies Contact Information Imagine Communications has office locations around the world For domestic and international location and contact information visit our Contact page http www imaginecommunications com company contact us aspx Support Contact Information For domestic and international support contact information see e Support Contacts http www imaginecommunications com services customer care aspx e eCustomer Portal http support imaginecommunications com e Academy Training http www imaginecommunicationsacademy com 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 2 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Contents Contents KEE 13 Manual InifortflatilOn EE 13 Nd ele 13 PUGION CE EROR TIER IEEE eege ee dees EDIDIT 13 tele NEE 13 Writing Conventions s on eter tnter seven ege Ee deg ee eege Eegen 13 Obtaining Ee la E EC 14 Unpacking Shipping Information sessies enne nennen tnnt erret entren 14 Unpacking aProdlct 3 nr Opt n idet i mmi 14 Returning a Product cccccccccececsssesseaeeecececeeseaeaecececesseseaaeeeseseceseeseuaeseeeeesessesauaeseeeesseeseauaeeeseseseesaes 14 Se OEY 15 Standards EE 15 Waste from Electrical and Electroni
170. idential February 2015 Page 26 Introduction Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Group Module Types Slots PX RES 2 See Resource Module PX RES on page 36 Reserved for future use 2 Frame Specifications Introduction The specifications in this section are for the Platinum IP3 frame and system wide components Specifications for individual modules are listed with their detailed descriptions Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice Table 5 Power Supply Specifications Item Specification Power Maximum 1500W power supply Output V1 5 VDC 10A V2 24 VDC 62A Current sharing FET Isolated Hot Swappable Performance temperature 41 F 5 C to 104 F 40 C at 100 power rating Operating temperature 32 F 0 C to 122 F 50 C at 100 power rating Efficiency 80 Plus Gold 87 20 and 100 load 90 at 50 load Power Consumption Power Consumption of Frame and Input Output Modules Table 6 Power Consumption Module 24V Power Rail 5V Power Rail Total Power PX RES 15W OW 15W PX ALARM ATDM 2W 0 35W 2 35W PX ALARM DATA 0 35W 0 35W 0 7W No Expansion 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 27 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Module 2
171. ield socket and 1x HD BNC connector 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 277 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Module LEDs wee INPUT 7 INERT NEES Description 6 8 9 OFF ON OFF OFF e Back Module contains 5x SFP sockets ON ON OFF OFF e Back Module contains 8x BNC connectors Output Module LEDs Output 1 Output 6 LEDs OUTPUT 1 to OUTPUT 6 flash to indicate abnormal hardware status in the slot Note that they are NOT turning on off at the same time Output 7 Output 8 Output 9 LED Outputs 7 8 9 OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT SA Description 7 8 9 OFF ON OFF e Front Module is SD 270Mbps only e Works only with specific Back Modules designed for the Platinum system ON ON OFF e Front Module is SD HD 3G e Works only with specific Back Modules designed for the Platinum system OFF SES ON e Front Module is SD 270Mbps only e Works only with specific Back Modules designed for the IP3 system ON OFF ON e Front Module is SD HD 3G e Works only with specific Back Modules designed for the IP3 system Output 13 Output 14 Output 15 Output 16 These LED outputs indicate Back Module types 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 278 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Table 125 LED Outputs 13 15 15 16 Module LEDs
172. igital Video Input and Output Modules for the IP3 Frame are covered in this chapter Digital Video Back Module Options Module Description Use With DIGITAL VIDEO INPUT MODULES PX HSR9C IBG Input Module on page 103 9 Channel Electrical Back Module with 9 HDBNC connectors PX HSR9O IBG Input Module on page 103 9 Channel Optical Back Module with 5 SFP connectors PX HSR9C1D IBG Input Module on page 104 9 Channel Electrical Back Module with 9 HDBNC connectors and 1 Densishield port for expansion PX HSR9O1D IBG Input Module on page 105 9 Channel Optical Back Module with 5 SFP connectors and 1 Densishield port for expansion PX IB Input Module See Input Modules PX IB on page 80 DIGITAL VIDEO OUTPUT MODULES PX HSR16C OBG Output Module on page 106 16 Channel Electrical Back Module with 16 HDBNC connectors PX HSR160 OBG Output Module on page 106 16 Channel Optical Back Module with 8 SFP connectors PX HSR80O2DS OBG Output Module on page 107 16 Channel Optical Back Module with 4 SFP connectors and 2 DensiShield ports for Expansion PX HSR8C2DS OBG Output Module on page 108 16 Channel Electrical Back Module with 8 HDBNC connectors and 2 DensiShield ports for Expansion PX OB Output Module See Output Modules PX OB see Input Modules PX IB on page 80 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary a
173. ilures and to report these failures to the Controller via the Resource card PX RES If any GPI Input is asserted the corresponding GPI Input LED on the PX ALARM module will be lit Fan Failure Alarm If any of the Front or Rear fan modules have a failure e This alarm condition is reported to the Platinum IP3 Controller via the Resource card e The FAN ALM LED on the PX ALARM module is illuminated e The Fan Alarm GPI Output is asserted triggered Power Supply Failure Alarm Each power supply provides a Power Supply Present signal and three critical alarms 24V 5V and FAN Failure All three alarms are critical to power supply and frame operation If any of these alarms are asserted e The Platinum IP3 Controller is notified via the Resource card e The PS ALM LED on the PX ALARM is illuminated red e The dedicated Power Supply Alarm GPI Output is asserted triggered If no alarm conditions exist the PS ALM LED is not illuminated and GPI Output is not asserted 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 54 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Alarm Expansion Module PX ALARM Power Supply Status Monitoring PX ALARM reports status of all internal and external power supply alarms and power consumption and internal power supply temperature reported over an DC interface The I2C signals from the power supplies within the Platinum IP3 frame are connected to the PX ALARM ATDM board
174. imary Video Crosspoint Zone 1 and 2 Alarm Expansion Card Zone 10r2 Data Switch Card Zone 1 or 2 ATDM Crosspoint Card Zone 1 Redundant ATDM Crosspoint Zone 2 Redundant Video Zone 3 and 4 Crosspoint Card 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 246 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual 1500 Watt Power Supply and External Power Supply Frame FRONT LOADING REAR LOADING Power from Zone Module Component Power from Zone Module Component Redundant Data Switch Zone 3 or 4 Output Monitoring Card Zone lor 2 Card Top Front Fan Module Zone 1 or 2 Top 4 Rears Fans Zone 1or2 Bottom Front Fan Module Zone 3 or A Bottom 3 Rears Fans Zone 3 or 4 Resource Module Zone 1 or 2 Redundant Resource Zone 1 or 2 Module Sync Module Left Zone 1 Sync Module Right Zone 2 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 247 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual 1500 Watt Power Supply and External Power Supply Frame Power Zones Power distribution is split into four separate zones Outputs 257 512 5 _ mme in III Outputs 769 1024 II Figure 106 Power Zones 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 248 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual 1500 Watt Power Supply and External Power S
175. inum IP3 Module can be controlled via the Controller When you access a module by clicking on it in the list of modules its parameters are displayed The total number of modules of that type in the frame is also displayed on the left PX HSR8CMX8C OBG PX HSR8CMX8C OBG Modules Parameters and Faults PX HSRSCMXSC OBG in Slot 3 View PX HSR8CMX8C OBG in Slot 4 Parameters Faults PX HSRSCMXBC OBG in Slot 24 4 PX HSRBCMXSC OBG e ino PX HSR8CMX amp 8C OBG in Slot 25 Genlock Show Table PX HSRSCMX8C OBG in Slot 26 Processed Outputs Serial Number PX HSR8CMX8C OBG in Slot 27 Unprocessed Outputs TESTO0000000 PX HSR8CMXSC OBG in Slot 28 PX HSR8CMXSBC OBG in Slot 29 PX HSR8CMX8C OBG in Slot 30 General Parameters License Key 4G9065Q3X78MFF Licensed Options Frame Sync Parameter Update Rate Fast Control Status Ready to Set Ver MK20_App_S6_V6 1 4 2 2e Module Status Module Ready Name Description Type Options Physical Info Indicates the temperature of the RO String in Degrees Temperature FPGA Celsius TABLE PARAMETER Physical Info gt Indicates proper functioning of the RO String Fan Status module s fan unit TABLE PARAMETER Serial Number Displays the module s unique RO String identifier License Key Activates the Frame Sync option RW String Licensed Options Displays activated options RO e None e Frame Sync Parameter Update Rate Defines the rate at
176. ite existing extended Audio packets There are 2 options in this case e Turn on ADS Clean See ADS Clean 1 8 TABLE PARAMETER prior to re embedding new Audio data to wipe out any existing Audio packets regular and extended e Set the Word Length parameter for the SDI channel in question to match the word length of the Audio data embedded in the incoming SDI stream The Word Length bits for processed Audio data are not auto detected based on the detected word length of the embedded Audio data and set This is to allow the flexibility for users to steer the word length of the re embedded Audio data such that it matches the word length of Audio data that originates from a different source for example Audio received via TDM Fast Video Switch When input video is switched between two sources while both sources are within vertical blanking use the Fast Switch TABLE PARAMETER parameter to enable fast video switching between the sources In this mode output video is not frozen when both sources are within the vertical blanking area when the switch takes place DeEmbed Control The following are options for the DeEmbed Control parameter Item Description Repeat Upon detection of a de embedding error the de embedder repeats the last good AES sample Mute Upon detection of a de embedding error the de embedder mutes the current outgoing AES sample Dolby E Detection SDI streams originating from 3rd part
177. l 5 Verify that the Rear Fan status LED is green PX FRONT FAN and PX REAR FAN Modules CAUTION The black shutters located behind the fans are necessary to prevent warm air from recirculating back into the frame Ensure the shutters are not removed Fuses Front and rear fans on the Platinum IP3 are protected by fuses If a fan fuse blows a serious electrical fault has occurred the fuse should not be replaced until the electrical fault has been corrected Use tweezers or needle nose pliers to lift the fuses straight out of their sockets CAUTION Fuses on the Front Fan module and Rear Fan Adapter boards should not be removed or replaced in a live powered Platinum IP3 frame Table 120 Fan Fuses Location Fuse Type Part Number Front PSF1 4 A Slowblow 127 100006Q00 PSF2 4 A Slowblow 127 100006Q00 FC1 750 mA Slowblow 127 100004Q00 Rear PSF1 5 A Slowblow 127 100010Q00 PSF2 5 A Slowblow 127 100010Q00 PSF3 750 mA Slowblow 127 100004Q00 Fuses on Front Fan Modules Front Fan fuses are visible inside the Front Fan module array To inspect or remove fuses first remove the array as described on page 4 see Front Fan Module on page 269 Then remove the fuses by lifting them straight out of their sockets Figure 134 Front Fan Fuses Top Module Shown 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 273 Platinum IP3 Installation a
178. l Audio TDM Crosspoint Module PX ATDM64 X28 33v C POWER 18 018 5v Mi 1 020 3 3VL_PIPE 1S Di 3V_MCU RH ACT CTRL pias ACT XPT Isai PRIMARY EP LE ud ond lt iS lt 3 Figure 33 LEDs on the PX_ATDM64_X28 Crosspoint Module Below the POWER LED are three other LEDS e 5V MI e 3 3VL PIPE e 3V MCU All of these LEDs should be Green when the frame is powered up If any one of them is not lit it indicates a power problem on the board or the frame Check Fuse FC1 See FC1 to see if its open PX ATDM64 X28 Parameters Category Name Description Type Options Module Power Status Indicates power status RO Good Bad PCB Rev The PCB Revision RO Note 1 3 are Prototype revisions 4 is the first 3 released revision 4 Fan Alarm Indicates if Fan Alarm RO Set Table Parameter has been set Fan Running Indicates whether fans RO Disabled Table Parameter are running Enabled 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 77 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Audio TDM Crosspoint Module PX ATDM64 X28 Category Name Description Type Options Upgrade from USB Enabling or Disabling RW Yes USB Upgrades No Upgrade State The state of any current No activity upgrades FPGA FPGA Rev The FPGA Revision RO lt String gt FPGA Temp The FPGA Temperature RO lt String gt FPGA Temp Alarm FPGA Tem
179. latinum IP3 Controller User Manual PX RES Redundancy Each Platinum IP3 frame can have up to two PX RES modules operating redundantly If one module detects failure of the other it switches over control and continues router operation The Resource module and optional Redundant Resource module are located in the middle of the frame Resource modules are visible when the front panel door is opened The PX RES module is divided into three main areas e User Interfaces on page 40 e Processing e System Interfaces 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 38 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Resource Module PX RES Communications Back Panel PX CBP The PX CBP communications back panel provides an interface between communications connectors and Resource Modules All control ports remain inactive until and only if the router has fully booted and has established communications Even in a powered down state a router connected to any communications system must not interfere with that system and therefore must not violate the communications standard RS 232 RS 422 IEEE 802 etc when in this state A temperature sensor on the PX CBP monitors the external ambient temperature B 9 T T o M Figure 10 PX CBP Communication Back Panel The following connector types are available on the PX CBP module e Four Ethernet Ports on page 40 e Four
180. latinum and Platinum IP3 Routers support all types of audio including Dolby E and AC3 Since audio processing such as quiet switching and gain controls can cause data corruption with non PCM audio Platinum routers support a pass through mode for these non PCM sources When using the Mux Demux modules within the router the audio packets are analyzed when they are demultiplexed When the system identifies a non PCM audio source all processing functionality is disabled This allows the non PCM audio data to pass through the router without being corrupted The quiet switch capability of the ATDM module is active by default Since the quiet switch capability can cause corruption for non PCM audio at the switchpoint the capability can be turned off for each output of the router using the Controller GUI When incoming audio is embedded within a video source that audio is routed through the Video wideband crosspoint without any processing The embedded audio and all ancillary data is presented at the output exactly as it entered the router 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 69 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Audio TDM Crosspoint Module PX ATDM64 X28 Audio TDM Crosspoint Module PX ATDM64 X28 Location in the IP3 Frame The Platinum IP3 frame includes two slots for Audio TDM Crosspoint modules One slot holds the Primary Active Audio TDM Crosspoint Module The second slot
181. lock signal and serialized at 10 times the data rate 270 MB s As the serial data is used to clock downstream devices the serial signal is scrambled and encoded using a non return to zero NRZI algorithm to ensure that clock transitions occur during long periods of all 1s or Os to keep the receiving PLLs locked The NRZI scramble polynomial is defined as G1 X X9 X4 1 and G2 X X 1 The completed NRZI serial signal is buffered into two copies of itself for distribution to the crosspoint module s within the frame Back Panel I O Module for PM DEC IB PT DEC IB The PT V BP back panel I O module corresponds to the PT DEC IB module Installation Input Module Installation All input modules are installed at our manufacturing facility If you need to purchase additional components please contact your dealer or our Sales Department Back Panel I O Module Installation All back panel modules are installed at our manufacturing facility If you need to purchase additional components please contact your dealer or our Sales Department Control This Module s parameters can be enabled and or changed via CCS Navigator or the IP3 Controller Controllable Parameters PT DEC IB User Controllable Parameters List Parameter Description Options Module Parameter Hysteresis Sets hysteresis for parameters 0 to 5 seconds in 500 ns steps needing it 1s Sync Select Selects which physical sync e Sync 1 port the module uses as a
182. magine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 75 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Frame Expansion Audio TDM Crosspoint Module PX ATDM64 X28 The Audio TDM architecture enables interconnectivity between two Platinum IP3 frames expanding to matrix sizes up to 16384x16384 including four AES output monitoring outputs per frame Each crosspoint send its inputs to the second frame via Densishield cables The Audio TDM Crosspoints in the top slots in each frame must be connected to each other using Densishield cable The Crosspoints in the bottom slots must also be connected together LED Indicators The following indicator LEDs are present on the front edge of the PX ATDM64 X28 module Table 34 Module System LEDs LED DESCRIPTION POWER SE Power Supply indicator Green When lit this indicates that 24V is enabled on this board ACT CTRL Active Control Red Initializing Solid Green FPGA has configured and the Resource Module PX RES is communicating with the card Flashing Green Alarm condition on the card ACT XPT Active Crosspoint Yellow When lit this indicates that this is the Main Crosspoint PRIMARY Green When lit this indicates the Audio TDM Crosspoint is driving audio outputs 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 76 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manua
183. me for example signal presence etc See Alarm Expansion Module PX ALARM on page 51 PX PS Power Supply Module Four Power Supplies supply the core components for each frame Frames with conversion or advanced processing options may require additional power supplies or additional power supplies may be added for redundancy See 1500 Watt Power Supply and External Power Supply Frame on page 246 PX PD TOP Power Distribution Modules PX PD BOT Interfaces with Power Supplies and distributes power to an IP3 system See External Power Supply Frame PX FR EXPS on page 251 PX TOP FAN Fan Module Top Fan module to cool video crosspoint at top of IP3 frame See PX FRONT FAN and PX REAR FAN Modules on page 266 PX BOT FAN Fan Module Bottom Fan module to cool video crosspoint at bottom of IP3 frame See PX FRONT FAN and PX REAR FAN Modules on page 266 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 25 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Module Description PX REAR FAN Fan Module Rear Rear fan module to cool modules in IP3 frame 7 Rear fan modules are installed in the IP3 frame and provide front to rear cooling See PX FRONT FAN and PX REAR FAN Modules on page 266 PX BP 28 Module Interconnect Backplane Provides central signal distribution module for the frame between input output and crosspoint modules See Module Intercon
184. meters are accessed by clicking the Advanced menu option in the parameter menu list Table 47 Output Modules Advanced Parameters Name Description Type Options Parameter Hysteresis Sets hysteresis for parameters needing it This parameter works as time constant of low pass filter of status reporting to ease CCS communication in case there is a flickering status report It can be changed as required RW O 10000000 2000000 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 99 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Specifications Technical Specifications Table 48 Output Module Technical Specifications Output Modules PX OB Item Description Output Connector 75 Ohm BNC per IEC 169 8 75 Ohm HD BNC e LC optical e DensiShield Impedance e 75 Ohms BNC HD BNC e 100 Ohms differential DensiShield Signal type e SMPTE 424M SMPTE 292M SMPTE 259M SMPTE 344M DVB ASI Most other lt 1Vpp digital signals 3Mb s to 3 0Gb s Return loss BNC HD BNC gt 15dB up to 1 485GHz 10dB 1 485GHz to 2 97GHz Amplitude e 800mV 1096 Overshoot e 1096 DC Offset e OV 0 5V Rise Time e 270Mb s 400 800pS e 1 485Gb s lt 135pS e 2 97Gb s 135pS Fall Time e 270Mb s 400 800pS e 1 485Gb s lt 135pS e 2 97Gb s 135pS Jitter e 270Mb s 1 485Gb s 0 2UI reclocked
185. multiplexer Modules process Do not interrupt the power supply or tamper with a board while an upgrade is in progress This could corrupt the firmware necessitating a restart of the upgrade process Note If the Software Version shows 0 00 this indicates that the PT FSDMX IBG is in failsafe mode In this mode the board will only support upgrade operations and basic control with the Platinum Resource module You can perform software upgrades as usual while the module is in failsafe mode but after the upgrade is completed the module will need to be hot swapped in order to have the new firmware take effect Activating PT FSDMX Functions The following topics are described in this section e Audio Order of Operations on page 4 see Audio Order of Operations on page 113 e Operating with the Frame Sync on page 5 see Operating with the Frame Sync on page 113 e Fast Video Switch on page 5 see Fast Video Switch on page 114 e Audio Test Tones on page 5 see Audio Test Tones on page 114 e Group 1 4 Deembedding Control on page 5 see Group 1 4 Deembedding Control on page 114 e Audio Embedding Modes on page 5 see Audio Embedding Modes on page 114 e Video Frame Synchronization on page 6 see Video Frame Synchronization on page 114 e Audio Synchronization on page 7 see Audio Synchronization on page 115 e PT FSDMX IBG Controllable Parameters on page 7 see PT FSDMX IBG Controllable Parameters on page 116 Audio Ord
186. n Loss gt 15 dB typical from 5 MHz to 1485 MHz gt 10 dB typical from 1485 MHz to 2970 MHz Electrical Output Back Module with DensiShield ten sehen O EC Formats ASI SD SDI HD SDI 3G SDI Supported Cable Type FCI 10116746 RO600BULF 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 141 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer Demultiplexer Modules Electrical Input Back Module with DensiShield Optical Output Fiber Back Modules with SFPs tem Sien o Output Power 5 dBm min 0 dBm max Gennum GF2922 Supported Video rates 270Mb s 1 5Gb s 3Gb s Supported Formats and Sampling ASI SD SDI HD SDI 3G SDI Structures Bit Error Rate Complies with SMPTE 297 2006 Note Gennum is the supported SFP for all Platinum Framesync Optical Modules PX HSRMX OBG Operation Power Up Sequence Due to the complexity of the board and its parameter list it takes about 2 minutes after power cycling a board before it is fully operational About 10 seconds after power cycling a board is ready to detect input signals but the outputs will not become active until the Resource card has completed uploading the previously used configuration parameters The readiness of the board is reflected by the read only Control Status parameter See General Parameters on page 145 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential
187. n Manual Module Interconnect PX BP 28 Figure 137 Fuses on the PX BP 28 MI Backplane Lok PPOTOPS n PPOTOP3 z Lal PPOTOPI e K2AN 22 DND ApNUr DU GND k24V 71 Li j d d f OD UO e K PUT BARCODE HERI 10A 125V M6 pu FB T0 Au ip c o e R27 10A L 161 100600000 rev 2 PX BP lis KI gi H 7 ee ee o ono oo o_o HOER 9909 Ra 9 d pe WO px ma d g d Pno een reo 6 6 6 c 96 c c o e LIN 95959509 o o occ co 5 6 LN e e scc c co 6 0 6 6 6 6 06 6 6 C 6 0 0 C 0 60 6 GO eo oo 60 06 10A 10A 125V 125V FB FB CS 6 c o c c 6 ete o c c c o o o 6 oc e o0 c c c c 6 0 6 6 0 c THIS WAY e e e ee ee 6 6 6 6 6666 6 OOo efefleflefefefefe e ee ee ee eeieieieieieie he c e c o o e c c c c o o o o o c 6 c c c o o 0 0 Sefefeieieee eege c 0 Cc 0 c 0 0 c c c 0 D 9 o g D o D 9 o D 0 9 D 9 9 9 9 D D 9 D 9 D 9 9 coc T D ww ccc c D 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 282 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Module Interconnect PX BP 28 Figure 138 Fuses at the top of PX BP 28 H SS e B RAUEN SEN 2A 125V TA 125V 2A 125V ebe B 7 PFOMZB 1 mnm Mami ELE H GH Us Hp TEI ETE TEST FPI70 PAR FB PFAEIA emm E RUE TALI Vire gt A 25V FB mr rm 10A h 125V BL v FB i PH Figure 139 Fuses on left arm of PX BP 28 FPS FB
188. n modules The PX AUX module is plugged into a card slot in the very center of the frame The PX AUX module contains fuses and Transient Voltage Suppressor TVS diodes for over current and Transient Voltage protection respectively Besides these components the PX AUX is passive The module connects power and communication signals from the IP3 MI backplane to the Front Fan Modules It connects 24VDC 5VDC power and a one wire interface signal to the two Front Fan Modules Figure 142 PX AUX Module The PX AUX has 3 connectors e One to the MI backplane e One to the Bottom Fan e One to the Top Fan WARNING The PX AUX module is hot pluggable however it is recommended that the frame is powered down first 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 286 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual PX AUX Fuses Auxiliary Module PX AUX Figure 143 Fuses on the PX AUX Module Table 127 PX AUX Fuse Ratings Fuse Name Fuse Type Fuse Rating Part Number F3 F1 Slowblow 4 Amps 127 100006Q00 Resettable 0 2 Amps 127 100005Q00 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 287 Platinum IP3 Auxiliary Module PX AUX Installation and Operation Manual PX AUX Block Diagram MI CONECTOR TOP FAN CARD CONNECTOR 24V_Z2 CONNECTOR NG
189. nd Confidential February 2015 Page 102 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Digital Video Modules PX HSR9C IBG Input Module The PX HSR9C IBG is a 9 channel SD HD 3G Digital Video Input Module with 9 HDBNC connectors Figure 42 PX HSR9C IBG Back Module This Back Module interfaces with the PX IB Input module to accept 9 electrical inputs See Input Modules PX IB on page 80 for details on the PX IB Input module Power Consumption Table 50 PX HSR9C IBG Power Consumption 24V Power Rail 10 7W 5V Power Rail 0 43W Total Power 11 13W PX HSR9O IBG Input Module The PX HSR9O IBG is a 9 channel SD HD 3G Digital Video Input Module with 5 SFP connectors The PX HSR9O IBG has 5 dual channel SFP modules mounted on the metal back panel of the back module each containing two channels The second channel of the last connector is not currently used The OP SFP RR and OP SFP R accept fiber optical signals within wavelength range of 1260nm 1620nm ol oio olo lolo oo REM E IN3 N4 INS ING WI INS Figure 43 PX HSR9O IBG The Back Module interfaces with the PX IB Input module to accept 9 optical inputs See Input Modules PX IB on page 80 for details on the PX IB Input module 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 103 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Digital Video Modules Power Consumption Table 51 PX HSR9O IBG
190. nd Operation Manual PX FRONT FAN and PX REAR FAN Modules Fuses on Rear Fan Adapter Boards Fuses are located under the base of the black shutter assembly found behind each rear fan To gain access to the rear fan fuses carefully grasp the two tabs on the sides of the shutter assembly Then slide the shutter assembly towards you tilting out the bottom so that the assembly pivots around the small studs at the top of the opening When replacing the shutter assembly ensure the top of the assembly is inserted behind these studs CAUTION Ensure you disconnect the two power cables shown in Figure when replacing rear fan fuses in a live powered IP3 frame 2 Pivot the shutter assembly from behind these studs 1 Grasp these tabs and pull forward Fuses are located below this cover Figure 135 Rear Shutter Assembly 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 274 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Also disconnect this 24 VDC power cable before removing or replacing fuses Figure 136 Rear Fan Fuses Disconnect this 5 VDC power cable before removing or replacing fuses 5 A fuses Power Consumption Table 121 FANS Power Consumption PX FRONT FAN and PX REAR FAN Modules im Deen MM IW i mt 750 mA fuse PX FRONT FAN TOP PX FRONT FAN BOT PX REAR FAN ADPTR PX REAR FAN 24V Power Rail 55 2W 55 2W 0 67W 5V Power Rail
191. nd Output modules each of which contains 8 or 9 inputs and 8 or 16 outputs and Crosspoint matrices redundant crosspoint paths can be configured for robust operation Depending on the configuration one or more modules may be present in the frame for various optional functions e Input and Output Modules on page 32 e Rear Connectors on page 34 e Crosspoint Modules on page 34 e Monitoring Modules Input and Output Modules Input and Output modules are front loadable and hot swappable They utilize high density BNCs HD BNC through which physical connections of 576 and 1024 are achieved in 28RU Video Frame expansion is achieved by utilizing the secondary switching capabilities of the output card Expansion enabled output cards transmit the required I O via two DensiShield cables each of which can transmit eight high speed differential pair signals Input modules are located on the right side of the frame and Output modules are located on the left side as viewed from the front when the front panel door is opened Both module types are visible from the front when the front panel door is opened e See PX IB Input Module General Overview on page 80 for a generic description of Input Modules e See PX OB Output Module General Overview for a generic description of Output Modules e See List of Supported Input and Output Modules on page 32 for a specific list of modules Note Platinum IP3 modules can be damaged if they are
192. nect PX BP 28 on page 280 PX SYNC MI Sync Module Interconnect The Sync and optional redundant sync module are located above the Resource Module They are visible when the front panel door is opened See Sync Module Interconnect PX SYNC MI on page 289 PX AUX Auxiliary board for providing power to Front Fan modules See Auxiliary Module PX AUX on page 286 PX PWR ADPTR Board used for connecting power from External Power Supply frame PX FR EXPS to boards within the IP3 frame See Power Adapter Module PX PWR ADPTR on page 290 Modules in the Frame by Function The Platinum IP3 is a 28 RU frame divided into sections for Input Output Crosspoint and Control modules The following is a representation of the division Group Module Types Slots Input All Input Modules 64 See List of Supported Input and Output Modules on page 32 Output All Output Modules 64 See List of Supported Input and Output Modules on page 32 Crosspoint Video Crosspoint 2 See Video Crosspoint Module PX 576x1024 3G on page 61 ATDM Crosspoint 2 See Audio TDM Crosspoint Module PX ATDM64 X28 on page 69 Control PT SYNC 2 See Sync Module Interconnect PX SYNC MI on page 289 Front Fan Modules 2 See PX FRONT FAN and PX REAR FAN Modules on page 266 Data Switch 1 PX ALARM DATA 1 See Alarm Expansion Module PX ALARM on page 51 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Conf
193. neenbinnls 93 PX OB Output Module General OvervieW eese ener nennen neris en nennen nnns 93 PX OB elt uerge ele Tu ET 93 PX OB ExpanslOn ite ite acces gebeten Eeer egt 94 Inserting Output Modules into the IDiframe nnne ennemis nennen nhan nnns 94 Failsafe IPTE 94 Signal Presence and LEDs cedere ee enano eere EAE eE E AAEE Get a sie ceu Lee a iE Erai 95 System BEDS cue ntt MEER M I EU LL 95 Module OR sep 96 Controllable Parameters i 2 deed deiade cue doaia EEN eege Nee 96 Parameter Notesi mosse aezenna ac daauonsuceqestseusayocctdenees aaae aae Ka a e aaaeeeaa e aaaeeeaa Eina 96 Module Root Level Parameters cccccccesssscccsessececeeseeeceeseeeecsesaececsesaeeeceesaeeecsesaeeecsesaeeeesesaeeeeeeaaes 97 OUTPUT Paratmeters E 97 Advanced Paramieters oii e ose rrt atero feed CNS ena De 99 Ki Et TH de EE 100 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 6 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Contents Technical E ie EE 100 ET 101 Control Requirements teens Zeene e Eege eet v esee ee e eege 101 Applications Integration ote teer ires etr eter hereto tee vOv eie Re aves ite a sev aa 101 Digital Video el 102 Digital Video Modules Overview cccseessssccecececseseaeaecececesseusecececscessesesaecesecuseeesaaaecesecssseseaeaeeneeens 102 PX HSR9C IBG Input Mo
194. ng the module attempts to overwrite any existing audio data and control packets of the same group number with the new audio data This setting is valid only if the audio group to be embedded already exists If the new sample distribution does not exactly match the existing audio data packet sample distribution the embedder will mark some audio data packets for deletion DID word will be set to 180h When you attempt Overwrite embedding and there is no previous audio no audio is embedded because there is nothing to overwrite ADS before embedding ADS after attempting to embed group 1 No audio is embedded Figure 69 Overwrite Embedding Mode When There is No Pre existing Audio The following figure shows how overwrite embedding will appear in the ancillary data space when there is auxiliary data where Group 1 should be inserted ADS before embedding other other EAV auxilliary data auxilliary data A B ADS after attempting to embed group 1 other other EAV fa WH data auxilliary data No audio is embedded Figure 70 Overwrite Embedding Mode When There is Auxiliary Data on Group 1 The following figure shows how overwrite embedding will appear in the ancillary data space when there is pre existing Group 1 audio This operation is successful ADS before embedding e meer ADS after embedding group 1 with overwrite group specified as Group 1 Figure 71 Overwrite Embedding Mode When There is Group 1 Audio in the Gr
195. ng features for each channel are e Video Frame Synchronizer and Delay e User selectable Loss of Video modes Black Freeze Pass Mute e Video ProcAmp Gain Offset Hue Black White Clip e SMPTE 352M Video Payload Detection Insertion e EDH SD and CRC HD Detection Insertion e Automatic ASI detection and bypass e Audio De Embedder 4 groups 4 mono channels per group e Audio Sample Rate Conversion SRC after de embedding PCM data only e Audio Synchronizer and Delay arbitrary Audio delay for PCM data only e Audio Test Tone Generator e Audio ProcAmp Gain Mute Invert Sum Swap e Audio Embedder with Append Overwrite mode e Supports mix of embedded PCM and non PCM Dolby E D data 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 137 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer Demultiplexer Modules Features based on Licensing e FS Framesync Mode with Framesync License e DLY Delay Mode with Framesync License e MUX Mux only Operation without Framesync License Table 75 Features based on Licensing Audio Sync Sample rate pem conversion Dolby E Header Alignment RS MUX e Framesync Delay Mode requires a Framesync License e Mux Mode is available on boards without the Framesync license installed e n Mux Mode SDI channels must be locked to the external reference for proper operation Audio Processing The Platinum IP3 output modul
196. nnels per port fields will be set accordingly by default Click Add Rows You will see 4 monitoring destinations added at Slot 6 and 7 ports 1 and 2 Selected View IP3 Database Save Validate Resync More Sources Undo Redo Insert Update Remove MON OUT 1 HD Video MON OUT 2 HD Video MON OUT 3 HD Video MON OUT 4 HD Video Add PX HSRAEC OM External Sources Inputs Go to the Sources tab Click Add to add the External Output Monitoring Sources Inputs 1 Add 4sources in total 2 at Slot 6 and 2 at Slot 7 Add Sources Enter the number of Sources to create 4 Use Name Index Create Sources using the following template Name Prefix Name Index Alias Long Name Description MON IN 1 Device Type Breakaway Source m HD Video Video Starting Location Frame Location Type Port Channel EXT Port 1 Video 1 Maximum number of Video Ports per module 2 Maximum number of Video Channels per Port 1 Add Rows Cancel Add 4 as the Number of Sources to create 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 239 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Output Monitoring Modules Change the name in the Name Prefix field to distinguish as a monitoring output for example include MON IN Select a Video Device Type and select the appropriate Frame Set Location Type to EXT Settings for Slot Port Channel Max No of Ports per module and Max No of Channels per po
197. noise reduction DNR to reduce low amplitude high frequency noise Gamma correction sub alias filtering SAF and user based color adjustments are performed in the parallel CCIR 601 domain The signal is then separated into its chrominance and luminance components sent through the low pass filters LPF to reduce aliasing effects incurred as a process of encoding the signal and resampled at 2X to further reduce aliasing The oversampled parallel signal is finally converted to analog composite video within the 10 bit DAC stage sent through a 4 pole low pass filter and buffered for presentation to the output BNC connector Through the control system you can control the low pass and notch filter selection NTSC or PAL video standard video pedestal internal test signal generator chrominance level and hue NTSC only brightness sharpness and digital noise reduction You must be careful when implementing the notch and low pass filters as a tradeoff between frequency response and out of band noise often takes place Each of the eight channels provide standard reporting of signal presence via card edge mounted LEDs Output 1 Output 8 and via the control system Additional system LEDs indicate the following e The power supply indicator POWER shows that 24V is present on the module e The control system acknowledgment indicator ACT CTRL shows that the control system is communicating with the module e The Output Active warning
198. nsitivity e 20dBm based on OP SFP RR OP SFP R Capacity Table 42 Input Module Capacity Number of Inputs From rear edge of module 9 Number of Outputs To MI connector 18 To rear edge of module 9 optional 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 90 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Input Modules PX IB Control Control Requirements All settings for the input circuitry are reset to the input slot s configuration on module insertion Settings follow module location not modules themselves This way modules can be moved from slot to slot without the need to reconfigure the input parameters Applications Integration The Magellan CCS Control System supports each input module via the Magellan CCS Navigator architecture with the router module installed and is available for control and monitoring from any Imagine Communications or SNMP supported control application 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 91 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Block Diagram PX IB FM Block Diagram
199. nt Slots 8 8 4 2 redundant Resource Slots 2 1 redundant 2 1 redundant 2 1 redundant TDM Slots 2 1 redundant 2 1 redundant 2 1 redundant Sync Slots 2 1 redundant 2 1 redundant 2 1 redundant PSU Slots 8 8 4 Monitoring Slots 1 4 4 Alarm Slots 1 1 1 Streaming Slots NA 1 1 Standard Equipment Power Supply 4 4 2 Fan Module Rear Front 2 2 1 Upgrade Options Redundant Power Supply Yes Yes Yes 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential Introduction February 2015 Page 24 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Introduction IP3 PLATINUM Architecture 28 RU 28 RU 15 RU PX FR 28 PT FR 28 PT FR 15 Redundant Resource Module Yes Yes Yes Redundant Sync Options Yes Yes Yes Redundant Crosspoint Yes Yes Yes Frame Specific Components Frame modular components include the following items Table 4 Frame Specific Components Module Description PX RES Resource Module PX CBP Provides control logic for an IP3 frame See Resource Module PX RES on page 36 Communications Back Panel Interfaces between communications connectors and resource modules See Communications Back Panel PX CBP PX ALARM Alarm Module Monitors power supplies and fans provides LEDs and relay alarm contacts for both and allows custom alarm configurations based on parameters within a fra
200. ntion has to be paid to the implementation of these filters as a trade off between frequency response and out of band noise is often encountered In the interest of keeping the luminance or Y signal bandwidth a peaking filter is available to the user There are also controls for the user to set the brightness contrast sharpness color saturation and hue of the incoming video signal Once the chrominance signals have been processed they are reunited with the luminance Y channel to complete the 10 bit YUV component digital signal Component Digital Packaging The parallel 10 bit component output of the ADC conversion is presented to the next process where it is packaged with the digitized sync information and given the proper start of active video SAV and end of active video EAV headers for a SMPTE 125M compliant parallel output signal Along with the parallel 10 bit video signal a 27 MHz clock signal is provided for latching the data words in the downstream serializer device Parallel to Serial Converter The parallel 10 bit video and clock signal are presented to the FPGA based serializer for conversion to SMPTE 259C serial digital component video at 270 Mb s The 10 bit parallel word is latched into the 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 226 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Analog Composite Video Modules serializer on the rising edge of the accompanying 27 MHz c
201. num IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer Demultiplexer Modules PX HSRMX OBG Frame Sync and Mux Output Module PX HSRMX OBG Overview The PX HSRMX OBG is a Frame Synchronizer and Audio Mux Output Module that adds unprecedented Video and Audio processing power to output boards in the IP3 Frame The PX HSRMX OBG Output Frame Sync card has 8 processed outputs and 8 unprocessed outputs Processed outputs refer to signals that pass through the Video Audio Frame Synchronizer which provides audio muxing capabilities Unprocessed outputs refer to SDI streams that are reclocked in the serial domain but are otherwise untouched Each Module presents 16 physical ports There are two versions of the output card each supporting either optical or coaxial connectivity Each version of the card supports processing on eight outputs The additional eight outputs are either used for system expansion beyond a single Platinum IP3 frame or as standard video outputs Both versions of the module are configured via the IP3 Database Editor Video and Audio Frame Synchronizers are available for each of the 8 processed SDI channels in addition to Audio Mux functionality Each SDI path is processed independently with support for SD 1 5 Gb s HD 3 Gb s HD and 3 Gb s Dual Link formats ASI signals are reported and processing stages are automatically bypassed Both full Framesync and Delay modes are available The PX HSRMX OBG module consum
202. o Device Type can be used since it maps 128 mono ports by default when inserting adding logical sources and or destinations See below example Main Database Sources Destinations Add Insert Update Remove Save Validate arme AES 14 AES AES 14 S QA 2 Slot 50 Port 14 AES 15 AES AES 15 AES QA 2 Slot 50 Port 15 AES 16 S 16 AES 16 AES QA 2 Slot 50 Port 16 MADI 1 MADI 1 MADI 1 Multiplex Mono Audio QA 2 Slot 47 Port 1 MADI 2 MADI 2 MADI 2 Multiplex Mono Audio QA 2 Slot 47 Port 2 MADI 3 MADI 3 MADI 3 Multiplex Mono Audio QA 2 Slot 47 Port 3 MADI 4 MADI 4 MADI 4 tultiplex Mono Audio QA 2 Slot 47 Port 4 MADI 5 MADI 5 MADI 5 Multiplex Mono Audio QA 2 Slot 47 Port 5 MADI 6 MADI 6 MADI 6 Multiplex Mono Audio QA 2 Slot 47 Port 6 MADI 7 MADI 7 MADI 7 Multiplex Mono Audio QA 2 Slot 47 Port 7 MADI 8 MADI 8 MADI 8 Multiplex Mono Audio QA 2 Slot 47 Port 8 MADI 9 MADI 9 MADI 9 Multiplex Mono Audio QA 2 Slot 47 Port 9 MADI 10 MADI 10 MADI 10 Multiplex Mono Audio QA 2 Slot 47 Port 10 MADI 11 MADI 11 MADI 11 Multiplex Mono Audio QA 2 Slot 47 Port 11 MADI 12 MADI 12 MADI 12 Multiplex Mono Audio QA 2 Slot 47 Port 12 MADI 13 MADI 13 MADI 13 Multiplex Mono Audio QA 2 Slot 47 Port 13 MADI 14 MADI 14 MADI 14 Multiplex Mono Audio QA 2 Slot 47 Port 14 atus Name lias ong Name lescription ype ocati MADI 5 MADI 5 MADI 5 Audio QA 2 Slot 47 Port 5 Audio 1 Figure 77 MADI Mono Audio Configuration For Stereo configuration and using the Multiplex S
203. o Platinum IP3 frames for Audio Expansion the Audio TDM Crosspoints in the Top slots of both Frames must be connected together and likewise the Crosspoints in the Bottom slots must be connected together The TOP XPT OUT1 DensiShield connector on IP3 frame 1 is connected to the TOP XPT IN1 DensiShield connector on Platinum IP3 cable and vice versa 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 52 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Alarm Expansion Module PX ALARM Controlling Fan Speed Under normal operating conditions fan speed is controlled by power consumption of the frame which directly corresponds to heat generated in the frame and ambient temperature The more cooling that is required the faster the fans will spin The following conditions will trigger the fan speeds to increase e Failure of a Rear Fan Module e Loss of communication to the Resource module PX RES e PX ALARM Module failure e Unplugging the PX ALARM module from the IP3 frame e Upgrading the PX ALARM Module s firmware Reporting Alarms and Fan Failures PX ALARM monitors the status signal of core components and reports any instance of a critical failure Reporting is done to the Platinum IP3 Controller via the Resource card PX RES and to the GPI Outputs and LEDs Table 20 Summary of GPIs on the PX ALARM module Number of Al T Al Detail arm Type arm Details lari User Definable
204. o RW e No Swap TABLE PARAMETER swap or copy the audio e Swap within a pair able to Right to left swap left and right i channels copy left e Left to right channel to the right channel and copy the right channel to the left DEEMBEDDING gt AUDIO SYNC Audio Channel Pair Selects the audio RW No Tracking Delay Track 8 x 8 tracking type e Synch Tracking Audio Channel Delay 8 x Selects the amount of RW i 16 delay applied to the 0 3000 ms in 1 ms audio channel SR DEEMBEDDING gt PROC AMP Y Gain x 8 Adjusts gain for the Y RW 3 0 to 3 0 dB 0 dB channel in 0 1 dB steps Cb Gain x 8 Adjusts gain to the Cb RW 3 0 to 3 0 dB 0 dB color difference in 0 1 dB steps component Cr Gain x 8 Adjusts gain to the Cr RW 3 0 to 3 0 dB 0 dB color difference in 0 1 dB steps component Y Offset x 8 Adjusts offset forthe Y RW 100 6 mV 0 mV in channel 0 8 mV increments Cb Offset x 8 Adjusts offset for the Cb RW 100 6 mV 0 mV in channel 0 8 mV increments Cr Offset x 8 Adjusts offset for the Cr RW 100 6 mV 0 mV in channel 0 8 mV increments White Clip Enable x 8 Controls level clipping RW e Disable according to the White e Enable Clip Level control White Clip Level x 8 Sets the white clip level RW 636 9 to 763 1 mV 700 mV in 0 8 mV 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 124 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Frame S
205. o correct audio polarity in the analog domain e Normal polarity e Invert polarity Crosspoint Type Determines crosspoint matrix e TDM XPT requirement e Wideband Lock Detect 1 16 RO Reports if data is re locked by e Not locked Table Parameter reclocking stage e Locked Phase Alarm 1 16 Table Parameter Alarm set if right and left channels are out of phase e No phase error e Phase error Clip Detect 1 16 RO Table Parameter Reports if signal on the input exceeds the maximum input amplitude e Signal OK e Signal clipping Audio Mute 1 16 Sets mute for any data passing e Muted Table Parameter reclocking stage e Unmuted Swap Copy 1 16 Swap Copy left and right audio e No swap Table Parameter channels NOTE This parameter is always applied after summing Swap left and right e Copy left to right Copy right to left Level Adjust 1 32 Table Parameter Indicates gain attenuation applied to mono channel 1 OdB to 30 dB in 0 5 dB increments Summing 1 16 Table Parameter Add left and right audio samples divide by 2 NOTE This parameter is always applied before swap copy e No summing Right to left e Leftto right Both 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 202 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Analog Digital Audio Converter Modules with TDM Param
206. o provides output presence detection and true output monitoring on each of the 16 channels Back Panel I O Module for PT AEBT OB PT AECT OB The PT AEB OBP back panel I O module corresponds to the PT AEBT OB output module The PT AEC OBP back panel I O module corresponds to the PT AECT OB output module DB 25 connectors are used on the PT AEB OBP and PT AEC OBP back panel I O modules To provide the required BNC interface the PT AEC BOC must be used in conjunction with the PT AEC OBP for connection to coaxial cables Figure 97 PT AEC BOC Cables Installation Output Module Installation All output modules are installed at our manufacturing facility If you need to purchase additional components please contact your dealer or our Sales Department Back Panel I O Module Installation All back panel modules are installed at our manufacturing facility If you need to purchase additional components please contact your dealer or our Sales Department Control This Module s parameters can be enabled and or changed via CCS Navigator or the IP3 Controller 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 218 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual AES Balanced Coaxial Modules with TDM Capability Controllable Parameters PT AEBT OB PT AECT OB User Controllable Parameters List RO Read only parameter Parameter Description Options Module Back Module Type Rep
207. ocked Position Figure 118 Power Supply with Latch in Locked Position 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 257 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual 1500 Watt Power Supply and External Power Supply Frame Power Supply Specs LEDs and Pinouts Power Supply Mechanical Specification Table 113 Power Supply Mechanical Specifications Item Specification Dimensions 4 5 Inches by 2 6 Inches by 10 25 Inches Cooling Forced Air Cooled Front to Back Airflow Variable Fan Speed Control Mounting Slides into existing cavity in the Platinum IP3 and External Power Supply frames Mechanically locks in place Field Swappable Fan Replaceable Cooling Fan Assembly Power supply incapable of powering up with cooling fan assembly removed Temperature Maintains full power at temperatures from 0 to 50 degrees Celsius Humidity 0 to 95 Humidity Non Condensing Power Supply Electrical Specification Table 114 Power Supply Electrical Specifications Item Specification Input Voltage Universal AC Input S0VAC to 265VAC Input Frequency 47 63Hz Power Factor Correction 29696 Efficient Active Meets EN61000 3 2 as a Class A Device when under 50 Load Max Test Voltage 230VAC Inrush Current Less than or equal to 50 Amps peak at 264VAC Power Supply Meets 80Plus Gold Efficiency Standard at Input Voltage of
208. odules are the main source of cooling for the Video Crosspoint modules In the event of a fan failure ensure that you replace the fan as soon as possible to prevent overheating The rear fans automatically switch to 7596 speed if one of the fans fails or is disconnected Fan failures are indicated by alarms to the IP3 Controller and by lit LEDs beside the fans themselves If either of the Front Fan modules is disconnected from the IP3 frame for a period of time the Rear Fan speeds will be increased to compensate to keep the IP3 Video Crosspoint and Data Switch modules cool 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 266 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual PX FRONT FAN and PX REAR FAN Modules The top and bottom Front Fan modules each have a recessed Reset button located next to the status LEDs When activated this button forces the fan module into Failsafe mode To put the Front Fan module into Failsafe mode for firmware reprogramming insert a paper clip into the small hole and then press and hold the button for three seconds Then use the IP3 Controller to upgrade the firmware on the Front Fan module Six individual fans Top Front with status LEDs Fan module Top fan module status LEDs Bottom fan module status LEDs Six individual fans Bottom Front with status LEDs Fan module Figure 126 Top and Bottom Front Fan Modules 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Propri
209. oint Module PX 576x1024 3G Putting the Video Crosspoint back into the Frame Table 27 Putting the Video Crosspoint Module back into the Frame When you need to put the Video Crosspoint Module back into the Frame note the notch at the bottom that the card should slide into Also note the notch at the top 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 65 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Video Crosspoint Module PX 576x1024 3G Video Crosspoint Module Parameters The Video Crosspoint Module can be accessed and controlled via the web based Platinum IP3 Controller PX XPT MS Modules Parameters and Faults PX XPT MS View Parameters Faults Module Status Module Ready 4 PX XPT MS Version Enable Power No Board Temperatures Show Table Temperature Alarm No Figure 24 Video Crosspoint Module Parameters Table 28 PX 576x1024 3G Parameters Name Description Type Options Module Status Displays current status of RO e Module Ready module e Firmware Upgrade Required e Module Power Failure e Module Over Temperature Enable Power This parameter is used to turn RW No the power to the board back Yes on if the board had shutdown due to over temperature Board Temperature Board Temperature in degrees RO 40 140 deg C 1 2 Celsius Table Parameter Temperature Alarm Indicates if there is a RO
210. omponent is an ancillary data stripper ADS This block removes all ancillary data packets in the input SDI stream prior to embedding Following the ADS block are four separate audio embedding subcomponents Each subcomponent has the ability to operate on only one audio group either appending or overwriting a predetermined group onto the SDI stream The audio embedding modes are Audio Group 1 4 Embedding Mode parameters Embedding Mode Options Table 76 Embedding Mode Options Omm wmm Append Attempts to insert the audio data and control packets immediately following the last existing audio data control packet in the horizontal ancillary region See Append Embedding on page 159 OverWrite Attempts to overwrite existing audio data and control packets of the same group number with the new audio data See OverWrite Embedding on page 162 Auto Attempts first to overwrite existing audio data and control packets of the same audio group number failing that it appends the new audio data and control packets immediately following the last existing audio data control packet refer to the Audio Group 1 4 Exists parameters to determine what audio groups are already present in the incoming SDI signal Disables embedding of audio data and control packets on a per group basis Append Embedding When you select Append embedding the module attempts to insert the audio data and control packets immediately following the last existin
211. on Table 56 PX HSR8O2DS OBG Power Consumption 24V Power Rail 18W 5V Power Rail 0 43W Total Power 18 43W PX HSR8C2DS OBG Output Module The PX HSR8C2DS OBG is a 16 channel SD HD 3G Digital Video Output Module es Ge Ga BB G amp RURAY OUT 1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 OUT5 OUT6 OUT7 OUT8 TER OUT9 16 Figure 51 PX HSR8C2DS OBG 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 108 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Digital Video Modules The PX HSR8C2DS OBG has 8 HD BNC connectors mounted on the metal back panel of the back module There are 2 DensiShield ports on the module one of them accepts up to 8 electrical inputs and the other can output up to 8 electrical outputs The DensiShield ports are intended for expansion The PX HSR8C2DS OBG interfaces with the PX OB Output Module to output up to 16 outputs See Output Modules PX OB see Input Modules PX IB on page 80 for details on the PX OB Output module PX HSR8C2DS OBG PX HSR80O2DS OBG Parametric Control The PX HSR8C2DS OBG PX HSR8O2DS OBG Module can be controlled via the Controller When you access a PX HSR9C IBG PX HSR9O IBG module by clicking on it in the list of Output Modules its parameters are displayed The total number of PX HSR8C2DS OBG PX HSR8O2DS OBG modules in the frame is also displayed on the left PX HSR8C2DS OBG PX HSR8C2DS OBG Modules Parameters and Faults PX
212. on holes Be sure to remove all of these clear plastic coatings before putting the unit into service IMPORTANT Only qualified personnel should perform service procedures Table 2 Safety Terms and Symbols in this Manual A WARNING Statements identifying conditions or practices that may result in personal injury or loss of life High voltage is present A CAUTION Statements identifying conditions or practices that can result in damage to the equipment or other property Standards Refer to the IP3 Safety and Standards Manual for details 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 15 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Preface Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment WEEE Compliance The European Union EU Directive 2002 96 EC on Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment WEEE deals with the collection treatment recovery and recycling of electrical and electronic waste products The objective of the WEEE Directive is to assign the responsibility for the disposal of associated hazardous waste to either the producers or users of these products As of August 13 2005 the producers or users of these products were required to recycle electrical and electronic equipment at end of its useful life and may not dispose of the equipment in landfills or by using other unapproved methods Some EU member states may have different deadlines In ac
213. ondary S DORZ Audio PCM and non PCM Money Demutiplexer Audio Data Dolby E D De Embedder will be in the same clock domain at this point hon Audi Channel Status Bi L TDM Audio H Audio TDM Soe from other Transmitter oe 8 to Audio Crosspoint Switch hannes Figure 57 PT FSDMX IBG PT FSDMXO IBG Functional Block Diagram 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 127 Platinum P3 Installation and Operation Manual Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer Demultiplexer Modules LED Indicators Figure 58 PT FSDMX Card Edge LED Indicators Table 67 PT FSDMX IBG PT FSDMXO IBG Specific LEDs LED Function Channel Status Ch 1 8 Red Power on test failed FPGA Temp FPGA Temp A B Red Above temperature limit PT FSDMX IBG Specifications Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice Table 68 PT FSDMX IBG Specifications Item Specification Number of inputs 8 Connector BNC IEC169 8 Impedance 75Q 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 128 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manu al Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer Demultiplexer Modules Item SD SDI 270Mb s Specification SMPTE 259M Format 525i59 94 625150 Return loss gt 18 dB from 5 MHz to 270 MHz Eq
214. onfidential February 2015 Page 120 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer Demultiplexer Modules Name Description Type Options e CH234 e CH1234 Group Sampling Rate 8 Reports the sampling RO e 48 0 kHz x 4 rate from the control e 44 1 kHz TABLE PARAMETER packet of the specified e 32 0 kHz audio group e N A e FreeRun Audio Format 8 x 16 Reports the AES format RO e PCM TABLE PARAMETER PCM non PCM of e Non PCM specified output embedded audio channel Parameters and Faults View Parameters Faults 4 PT FSDMXO IBG General Genlock 4 Input SDI Video Standard Signal Presence EDH Present 4 Embedded Audio Status Group Presence Group Active Channels Group Sampling Rate Audio Format b Processing Version Show Table Show Table Show Table CRC EDH Error Counter Show Table CRC EDH Error Clear Show Table Input Optical Power SFP Type Figure 56 PT FSDMX IBG Input Parameters Processing Parameters Table 66 PT FSDMX IBG Processing Parameters Show Table Show Table Name Description Type Options VIDEO TSG Enable x 8 Enables and disables the RW e No 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 121 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexe
215. ontroller Controllable Parameters Table 96 PT AEBT IB PT AECT IB User Controllable Parameters List RO Read only parameter Parameter Description Options 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 211 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual AES Balanced Coaxial Modules with TDM Capability Parameter Description Options Module Back Module Type Displays the back module type e PT AEBT BMI connected to the PT AEBT IB pT AECT BMI or PT AECT IB module e PT AEB BMI e PT AEC BMI Audio Reference Selects AES reference input for e Sync A source e Sync 3 e Sync 2 e Sync 1 Board Level Hysteresis Sets hysteresis for parameters 0 to 5 seconds in 500 ns steps needing it Sync Select Selects which physical sync e Sync 1 port the module uses as a e Sync2 reference e Sync3 e Sync 4 In Tone 1 16 Indicates type of tone to send e Pass input Table Parameter out AES output e Silence e 500 Hz e 1K Polarity Reversal 1 32 Table Parameter Reverses and to correct audio polarity in the analog domain Normal polarity Invert polarity SRC Table Parameter Enables SRC if licensed No Yes Signal Presence 1 16 RO Table Parameter Reports presence or absence of valid signal Signal absent Signal present Phase Alarm 1 16 RO Table Parameter Alarm set if left and right channels are out of ph
216. ore it is slid into the frame This prevents damage to the frame and latch Unlocked Position ma Rau ONO BD ly Figure 116 Power Supply with Latch in Unlocked Position Power Supplies in PX FR 28 The PX FR 28 IP3 Frame comes with 4 Power Supplies at the four corners of the frame You can install an additional 4 Power Supplies in this Frame 2 on top and 2 at the bottom See Installation Instructions on page 256 Power Supplies in PX FR EXPS The PX FR EXPS External Power Supply Frame does not come with any Power Supplies You need to purchase power supplies separately and then install them in this Frame See Installation Instructions on page 256 Installation Instructions To install a Power Supply 1 Align a Power Supply PX PS with the slot on the Frame 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 256 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual 1500 Watt Power Supply and External Power Supply Frame 2 Gently slide the Power Supply PX PS into place it should snap into the Frame Figure 117 Power Supply being inserted into Frame 3 After the Power Supply PX PS is fully inserted into the frame Loosen the thumbscrew on the latch of the Power Supply turn counter clockwise Push the latch on the Power Supply all the way to the left to lock the Power Supply into place Tighten the thumbscrew turn clockwise to lock the latch in place L
217. orts coax or balanced back e PT AEBT BMO module e PT AECT BMO e PT AEB BMO e PT AEC BMO Audio Reference Selects AES reference input for e Sync 4 source e Sync 3 e Sync 2 e Sync 1 Parameter Hysteresis Sets hysteresis for parameters 0 to 5 seconds in 500 ns steps needing it Sync Select Selects which physical sync e Sync1 port the module uses as a e Sync2 reference e Sync3 e Sync4 Out Tone 1 16 Indicates type of tone to send e Pass input out AES output e Silence e 500 Hz e 1K Polarity Reversal 1 32 Reverses and to correct audio polarity in the analog domain e Normal polarity e Invert polarity Crosspoint Type Determines crosspoint matrix e TDM requirement e Wideband Disconnect State Select whether to transmit AES e Silence silence or a DC level when e DC signal presence is lost Lock Detect 1 16 RO Reports if data is re locked by e Not locked Table Parameter reclocking stage e Locked Phase Alarm 1 16 Table Parameter Alarm set if right and left channels are out of phase e No phase error e Phase error Clip Detect 1 32 RO Table Parameter Reports if signal on the input exceeds the maximum input amplitude e Signal OK e Signal clipping Audio Mute 1 16 Table Parameter Sets mute for any data passing reclocking stage e Muted e Unmuted 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 219 Platin
218. osure to ground 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 59 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Alarm Expansion Module PX ALARM There are LED indicators on the Resource Module and the Power Supply Modules e Status LEDs indicate power supply status resource module usage and link light indicators for Ethernet communication ports e Alarm LEDs indicate user defined alarm conditions LED indicators reflect the status of subsystems inside the frame The indicators for each power supply provide information on each voltage rail and the power supply s fan The indicators from each resource module provide status information of the frame s resource module These indicators are lit green when the system is functioning properly and red if a failure condition exists Failsafe Upgrade Should the PX ALARM module get corrupted and the Platinum IP3 Controller cannot update the firmware e Press and hold the Fail Safe A and Fail Safe D for 3 seconds e Use a paper clip to Press the button on the back of the Alarm module e Use the Platinum IP3 Controller to update the firmware on the PX ALARM module Power Consumption Table 26 PX ALARM Power Consumption PX ALARM ATDM PX ALARM DATA No Expansion PX ALARM DATA Expansion 24V Power Rail 2W 0 35W 6W 5V Power Rail 0 35W 0 35W 0 4W Total per Module 2 35W 0 7W 6 4W 2015
219. oup 1 Space Audio Synchronization By default the modules synchronize de embedded audio with timing information from the video frame synchronizer prior to re embedding audio PCM Audio either from embedded or from TDM will be automatically delayed to match the video delay Additionally up to three seconds of delay can be added through the Channel Delay parameter 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 162 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Video Frame Synchronization Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer Demultiplexer Modules The Frame synchronizer offers two modes Delay mode and Synchronizer Sync mode These modes can be chosen using the Frame Sync Mux Mode 1 8 parameter e In Delay mode the output video is synchronized to the input video e In Sync mode the output video is synchronized to the reference video The reference standard you can use depends on the output video standard set Reference Output Video Reference Output Video Standard Standard Standard Standard 525i 59 94 e 1080i 59 94 1080i 60 e 1080i 60 e 1080p 59 94 1080p30 e 1080p 60 e 1080p 29 97 e 1080p 30 e 720p 59 94 e 720p 60 e 525i 59 94 e 1080p 60 DL e 1080p 59 94 DL 625i 50 e 1080i 50 1080i 59 94 e 1080i 59 94 e 1080p 50 1080p 29 97 e 1080p 29 97 e 1080p 25 e 1080p 59 94 e 720p 50 e 720p 59 94 e 625i 50 e 525i 59 94 e 1080p 50DL e 1080p 59 94 DL
220. ow Table High Parameter External Alarm Set based on whether the alarm is RO No enabled GPI status and trigger Yes value External Alarm Enable External Alarm Enable RW No Yes User Configurable Alarm Triggers a GPO to an external RW No Table Parameter system Yes Rear Fans Bear Fan Speed Reports the speed in RPM of the fan RO 0 7000rpm Rear Fan Failed Set to yes if there is a loss of RO No communication to the fan or fan is Yes spinning too slow PX ALARM DATA PX ALARM DATA Modules PX ALARM DATA Parameters and Faults View Parameters Faults 4 PX ALARM DATA Alarm Rear Fans Back To Parameters PS Arabicat Tempe 33 0 33 0 34 PS Fan Failed No General PX ALARM DATA PSU PS Ambient Temperature Degrees C PS Secondary Temperature Degrees C 40 PS 5VL Current amps 0 29 PS 24VL Current amps 12 64 Figure 21 PX ALARM DATA Parameters PX ALARM ATDM Parameters Table 24 PX ALARM ATDM Parameters Name Description Type Options Power Good Informs the user if board is experiencing RO No any power issues Yes 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 58 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Alarm Expansion Module PX ALARM Name Description Type Options TDM Cable Present Set to yes if there is a densishield cable RO No Table Parameter plu
221. ower Rail 0 15W Total Power 50 15W Table 71 PT FSDMXO IBG Power Consumption 24V Power Rail 52W 5V Power Rail 0 15W Total Power 52 15W PT FSDX8C1D IBG Frame Sync Input Module with Matrix Expansion PT FSDX8C1D IBG Operation The PT FSDX8C1D IBG is an 8 Channel Frame Synchronizer and Demux Input Module that provides Video and Audio processing to input boards in the IP3 Frame This Input module enables video matrix expansion A high density interconnect cable routes the eight incoming signals to a second frame All functions and features of the PT FSDX8C1D IBG module are identical to the PT FSDMX IBG module on which it is based See PT FSDMX IBG PT FSDMXO IBG Frame Synchronizer and Demultiplexing Input Modules on page 111 WARNING Ensure that you mate the front and back modules before plugging in the DensiShield cable This protects your back module from any unintended alignment issues PT FSDX8C1D IBG Input Module The PT FSDX8C1D IBG Input module provides 8 input SDI options via HD BNC connectors In addition these 8 input SDI signals are re clocked and output via a DensiShield connector C NEC p ovo o Q N IN4 IN 5 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 130 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer Demultiplexer Modules Figure 59 PT FSDX8C1D IBG Back Module Figure 60 PT FSDX8C1D IBG
222. ower Supplies that come with the PX FR 28 frame e See External Power Supply Frame PX FR EXPS on page 251 for information on the optional Power Supply Frames e See External Power Supply Frame PX FR EXPS on page 251 on information on Power Distribution Modules that interface between the R 1500 power supplies and the PX FR EXPS e See Installing Power Supplies on page 256 for Power Supply Installation information Power Distribution Zones The Platinum IP3 frame PX FR 28 is divided into four 24V Power Zones and two 5V Power Zones to manage power distribution and loading within the frame For low power modules such as the PX HSR9C IBG or PX HSR16C OBG 2N redundancy can be achieved with a second PX PS plugged into a Power Zone For high power modules such as the HV SXP 16x3 or PT FSDMX IBG redundancy may require the External Power Supply Frame PX FR EXPS depending upon the number of modules plugged into that Power Zone Each PX PS has a 24V and 5V output power rail When a PX PS is plugged into the IP3 frame or External Power Supply Frame its 24V output will connect to one of the four 24V power zones and its 5V output one of the two 5V power zones The following table lists the core modules that can be plugged into the frame and which 24V Power Zone they are connected to Table 112 Power Distribution Zones FRONT LOADING REAR LOADING Power from Zone Module Component Power from Zone Module Component Pr
223. p 23 98 720p 30 720p 29 97 1080p 60 DL 1080p 59 94 DL 1080p 50 DL 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 86 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Input Modules PX IB Name Description Type Options Video Error Detects video standard error in RO Yes input signal based on the SMPTE No 352M packet if present and the N A standard detected by the input card EQ Bypass Sets the EQ mode RW On Off Default Reclocker Mode Sets the reclock mode to automatic RW Auto Default or bypass or to one of three manual 3G fixed rates HD SD Bypass Lock Detect Reports if data is relocked by RO Yes reclocking stage No Rate Detect Detects data rate RO Unknown SD HD 3G Mute Mutes the output of the board RW Yes No Default EDH Presence EDH package present in input SD RO Yes signal No N A Input EDH Error EDH error present in input SD signal RO Yes No N A Input Optical Power Reports input optical signal power RO Too Low Modules with SFPs level 32 1dBm only Too High CRC EDH Error Fields Shows CRC EDH errors RO 0 65535 CRC EDH Counter Enables or disables the CRC EDH RW Enable Default Control Error Fields counter and the Video Disable Error detector CRC EDH Error Clear Clear CRC EDH error counter RW Yes No Default 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential Fe
224. p to 16 AES digital audio signals Each of the inputs is presented to separate input buffers which perform the basic signal recovery and internal conversion to balanced low voltage differential signals LVDS for use in the FPGA based signal presence detection and router distribution circuitry 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 210 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual AES Balanced Coaxial Modules with TDM Capability Back Panel I O Module for PT AEBT IB PT AECT IB The PT AEB IBP back panel I O module corresponds to the PT AEBT IB input modules The PT AEC IBP back panel I O module corresponds to the PT AECT IB input modules DB 25 connectors are used on both the PT AEB IBP and PT AEC IBP back panel I O modules To provide the required BNC interface the PT AEC BOC must be used in conjunction with the PT AEC IBP for connection to coaxial cables Figure 92 PT AEC BOC Cables Installation Input Module Installation All input modules are installed at our manufacturing facility If you need to purchase additional components please contact your dealer or our Sales Department Back Panel I O Module Installation All back panel modules are installed at our manufacturing facility If you need to purchase additional components please contact your dealer or our Sales Department Control This Module s parameters can be enabled and or changed via CCS Navigator or the IP3 C
225. pability Pinout Diagram PM AEBT OB PT AEBT OB Pinout Information 1 13 94 13 1 12 9 12 1 Gnd 25 9 Gnd 25 2 24 10 24 2 23 10 23 2 Gnd 11 10 Gnd 11 3 10 11 10 3 9 11 9 3 Gnd 22 11 Gnd 22 4 21 12 21 4 20 12 20 4 Gnd 8 12 Gnd 8 5 7 13 7 5 6 13 6 5 Gnd 19 13 Gnd 19 6 18 14 18 6 17 14 17 6 Gnd 5 14 Gnd 7 4 15 4 7 3 15 3 7 Gnd 16 15 Gnd 16 8 15 16 15 8 14 16 14 8 Gnd 2 16 Gnd 2 Spare Gnd 1 Spare Gnd 1 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 222 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Specifications AES Balanced Coaxial Modules with TDM Capability Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice Table 101 PT AEBT OB AES Specifications Item Specification Number of outputs 16 Output type Balanced transformer coupled Output connector DB 25 Impedance 1100 Signal type AES3 AES frame rates from 32 kHz to 192 kHz Other 4096 6096 duty cycle digital signals from 2 Mb s to 25 Mb s Jitter 5ns Output amplitude 5 Vp p 1 V into 110 load DC offset 0V 0 05V Rise fall times 5 ns 30 ns Propagation delay 170 ns Table 102 PT AECT OB Specifications Item Specification Number of outputs 16 Output type Unbalanced Output connector
226. perature RO lt String gt Alarm Parameters and Faults View Parameter Faults 4 PX ATDM XPT Power Status Module FPGA Fan Alarm Show Table Fan Running Show Table Upgrade from USB No Upgrade State No activity Figure 34 PX ATDM64 X28 parameters Firmware Upgrade Follow this procedure to upgrade firmware from USB 1 Extract the IpxAtdmXpt and atdm board app bin files from the ZIP upgrade package px atdm xpt 1 6 zip to a folder on the Windows computer host being used for the upgrade Rename atdm board app bin to atdm board app Attach a USB cable from the host to the USB connector on the front of ATDM Crosspoint board The first time the USB cable is connected from the host to the ATDM Crosspoint make sure the ATDM Crosspoint board shows up as a Portable device disk without any warning in the Window device manager 4 After a generic USB disk driver is installed the Windows host will pop up a window prompting for a quick disk format 5 Afterthe disk is formated create a folder ATDM on the disk ATDM crosspoint board 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 78 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Audio TDM Crosspoint Module PX ATDM64 X28 6 Copy the files IpxAtdmXpt and atdm board app from the folder on the host to the ATDM folder in the ATDM Crosspoint 7 After copying the files to the ATDM Crosspoint board
227. pliance are installed by Imagine Communications Manufacturing to block the empty I O slots 1 slot 8 slot and 16 slot plates are available If a Rear Filler plate is removed to install a new module the empty slots should be closed with a Filler plate 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 22 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Introduction Platinum IP3 Frame Architecture CR RI Outputs 1 256 W s Primary Data Switch Outputs 257 512 Inputs 144 288 Outputs 513 768 Outputs 769 1024 Redundant Data Switch Inputs 433 576 V RA 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 23 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Figure 5 Platinum IP3 Frame Architecture Platinum IP3 Physical Specifications Table 3 Platinum IP3 Physical Specifications IP3 PLATINUM Architecture 28 RU 28 RU 15 RU PX FR 28 PT FR 28 PT FR 15 Dimensions Width 17 5 in 44 5cm 17 5 in 44 5 cm 17 5 in 44 5 cm Depth 18 5 in 46 7cm 18 5in 46 7cm 18 5 in 46 7cm 23 5 in including rear fans Height 49 0 in 124 5 cm 49 0 in 124 5 cm 26 25 in 66 7 cm Weight fully loaded approx 172 kg 350 Ib 159 kg 210 Ib 95 kg Matrix Size 576x1024 512x512 256x256 Matrix Module Capacity Input Slots 64 64 32 Output Slots 64 64 32 Video Crosspoint Slots 2 Crosspoi
228. plify field upgrade and the manufacturability of the power section the External Power Supply connectors are located directly on the rear of the frame with a plastic cover when not in use To accomplish this a separate module is used to interconnect the MI power distribution section to the rear metalwork with a card edge on one side and a right angle connector on the other with retention to the metalwork Required Equipment Note In order to minimize the risk of damage to components the IP3 frame must be powered down during PX FR EXPS installation This unit contains Electro Static Discharge Sensitive ESDS devices recognized handling precautions should be observed e One Platinum IP3 Frame PX FR 28 e Two PX FR EXPS e One Flash light e Screw Drivers and other hand tools Power Cables The PX FR 28 IP3 frame does not need to be specifically configured for the PX FR EXPS external power supplies 24 or 90 DC power cables must be connected between the PX FR 28 and PX FR EXPS frames AC Power Cords also need to be connected between the IP3 Frame and the External Power Supply Frame 24 Male to Male Combination D Sub 165 100036Q00 Standard length cable that connects the PX FR 28 Frame to the PX FR EXPS Note Four 24 cables are included when you buy the PX FR EXPS frame 24 cables are recommended to minimize power loss in the system If 24 cables are used to connect the PX FR EXPS to the PX FR 28 one PX FR EXPS unit must be
229. point module Primary Video Crosspoint located behind Fan Module ll II Redundant Video Crosspoint located behind Fan Module p igeensssesssas L H 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 62 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Video Crosspoint Module PX 576x1024 3G Extracting the Video Crosspoint from the Frame 1 On the lower extractor press the back side of the locking pin while pushing the extractor in 2 After the extractor releases pull it down LGS E am e 23 3 On the upper extractor press the back side of the locking pin while pushing the extractor in 4 After the extractor releases pull it down 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 63 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Video Crosspoint Module PX 576x1024 3G 5 While holding back the Fan Module grasp the upper and lower extractors and pull outward 6 With the extractor handles horizontal begin sliding the crosspoint module out 7 Gently remove the Crosspoint Module ensuring that you support it from the middle rather than the front of the module 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 64 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Video Crossp
230. put Module with Matrix Expansion on page 130 The following Frame Synchronizer Mux Output Modules are available Table 59 Frame Synchronizer Mux Output Modules Module Description PT HSRMX8X OBG 8 Channel Frame Synchronizer and Mux Output Module with BNC Optical connectors See PT HSRMX8C PT HSRMX80 OBG Frame Synchronizer and Mux Output Module 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 110 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer Demultiplexer Modules PT FSDMX IBG PT FSDMXO IBG Frame Synchronizer and Demultiplexing Input Modules The PT FSDMX IBG and PT FSMDXO IBG 8 Channel Frame Synchronizer and Demux Input Boards add Video and Audio processing to input boards in the IP3 Frame e The PT FSDMX IBG back module provides BNC connectors e The PT FSDMXO IBG back module provides optical inputs through SFP fiber optical receiver modules Each SDI path is processed independently and supports SD 1 5Gb s HD 3Gb s HD and Dual Link formats The De embedded sample rate converted and processed audio data of all 8 SDI channels is provided to the audio crosspoint for distribution Both modules consume up to 50 watts each depending on operating conditions Key Features Key processing features for each channel are e Video ProcAmp gain hue black white clip e SMPTE 352M video payload detection and insertion e EDH SD
231. r Demultiplexer Modules Name Description Type Options TABLE PARAMETER test signal generator Yes TSG Pattern x 8 TABLE PARAMETER Selects the test pattern for the test signal generator RW Bar 75 Bar 100 Eq Test PLL Test TSG Standard x 8 TABLE PARAMETER Selects the video standard for the TSG default is to follow the detected standard RW Follow RX 525i 59 94 625i 50 720p 25 720p 29 97 720p 30 720p 50 720p 59 94 720p 60 1080p 23 98 1080p 24 1080p 29 97 1080p 30 1080p 25 1080i 50 1080i 59 94 1080i 60 1080p 50 1080p 59 94 1080p 60 1080p 50 DL 1080p 59 94 DL 1080p 60 DL 1080sF 23 98 1080sF 24 EMBEDDING Dolby E Start Line ADS Clean Group Embedding Mode 8x4 Selects the embedding mode for the specified audio group Off Append Overwrite Auto 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 122 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer Demultiplexer Modules Name Description Type Options Dolby E Auto Align Yes No AUDIO Fade Rate x 8 Specifies the fade rate RW O 10 10 s in 1 second steps Word Length x8 Specifies the audio word RW e 16 bits length for all audio e 20 bits channels within the SDI e 24 bits stream V Bit Mute Enable Enables automatic RW e No
232. r Sources Inputs in the same way 3 To view any of the external PX HSRAEC OM inputs Route the MON Input created in Add PX HSRAEC OM External Sources Inputs on page 239 to the corresponding monitoring Output created in Add PX HSRAEC OM Destinations on page 238 NOTE You can only monitor 1 channel from any given Output module If you choose to monitor another channel from a given Output module it will only be allowed if that channel is routed to monitoring port OUT 1 And in doing so you will disconnect any routes from another channel on that given Output card slot module to the other monitoring ports OUT 2 OUT 4 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 242 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Output Monitoring Modules Specifications Video Specifications Table 110 PX HSRAEC OM Video Specifications Items Specification O Watgen NumberofOutpus S SMPTE 344M DVB ASI 3Mb s to 3Gb s Max input cable length 1694A e Up to 150m for 3Gbps e Up to 200m for 1 5Gbps e Up to 400m for 270Mbps Reclocking e Automatic for data rates defined by SMPTE 424 259 292 344 DVB ASI e Bypass for all nonstandard rates Return Loss e 15dB upto 1 5GHz e 10dB from 1 5GHz to 3GHz lt 2UI frequency tested Output Amplitude 800mVp p 1096 DC offset OV 0 5V Rise Fall times e 400ps 1500ps for 270Mbps e 270pS for 1 5Gbps e 135pS for 3Gbps Overshoot 1096 of amplitu
233. red e Module Power Failure e Module Over Temperature Module Power Good Informs the user if board RO e Yes is experiencing any e No power issues 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 244 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Output Monitoring Modules Name Description Type Options Sync Select Selects which physical RW e Sync1 sync port the module e Sync2 uses as a reference e Sync3 Note Actual signals are e Sync 4 not synchronized to the reference This parameter only affects switch timing SDI In Signal Presence Indicates presence of RO e Yes Table Parameter SDI or ASI signal ASI e No signals will automatically bypass all processing stages Audio AES Input Present e Yes Table Parameter e No TDM RX Input Present e Yes Table Parameter e No TDM RX CRC Error Clear RW e No Table Parameter e Yes Audio Reference Selects AES reference RW e Sync1 input for source e Sync2 e Sync3 e Sync 4 DARS Input Present e Yes e No 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 245 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual 1500 Watt Power Supply and External Power Supply Frame 1500 Watt Power Supply and External Power Supply Frame Power Supplies Overview e See Power Supplies PX PS on page 250 for information on the R 1500 P
234. rious output interfaces such as standard BNC coaxial cables HD BNC coaxial cables and SFP optical fiber PX OB output modules are hot swappable Each PX OB output module provides a maximum of16 output signal channels Output modules accept 32 signals from the crosspoint matrix Each output channel also contains an output monitoring path which feeds the output signal seen on any channel back to an optional rear mounted output monitoring card ID Figure 40 PX OB Generic Output Module PX OB Output Options The PX OB is designed in front module plus back module structure A single common front module FM combines with different back modules to provide several IO variations The PX OB Output Module combines with the following back modules e PX HSR16C OBG Output Module e PX HSR160 OBG Output Module e PX HSR8C2DS OBG Output Module e PX HSR8O2DS OBG Output Module 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 93 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Output Modules PX OB Table 43 PX OB Output Options Back Module Type Number of Outputs HD BNC Sixteen Electrical Outputs SFP optical Sixteen Optical Outputs PX OB Expansion PX OB also provides a router expansion 8 input channels interface using DensiShield See PX HSR8C2DS OBG Output Module and PX HSR802DS OBG Output Module Inserting Output Modules into the IP3 frame Each Output Module may
235. rocessing Notes De embedding For De embedding audio must be embedded synchronously at a sample rate of 48kHz Embedded Dolby E frames must be properly aligned with the Video frame in order to be transferred from the Frame Synchronizer s input clock domain into the output clock domain Proper alignment position of guard band is important since Dolby E frames can be dropped or repeated alongside the active video content TDMed Audio All Audio channels received from the Audio crosspoint via TDM are assumed to have a 48kHz sample rate and locked to the same Video reference applied to the board Automatic Dolby E header alignment supported for Dolby E data received via TDM where Audio data PCM or non PCM is expected to be already synchronous to the reference applied to the board When receiving Dolby E data via TDM alignment with the actual Video data is unknown and it is therefore important to have the Dolby E data automatically re aligned prior to muxing it back into the SDI stream Sample Rate Conversion is applied to both de embedded and TDM Audio data but only if it is PCM The downstream clock for the SRCs will be locked to the applied Video reference Non PCM Audio data such as Dolby E D cannot be sample rate converted If Non PCM Audio originates from the ingested SDI channel embedded Audio it is transferred from the input clock domain to the output clock domain by dropping or repeating a full frame of non PCM data every time
236. rols level clipping Rw l Diane e Enable according to the White Clip Level control 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 150 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer Demultiplexer Modules Name Description Type Options White Clip Level mV RW ip Level iin Sets the white clip level 636 9 to 763 1 mV 700 mV in 0 8 mV increments Black Clip Enable i P Controls level clipping Rw Dane according to the Black e Enable Clip Level control Black Clip Level mV ack KREE geet Geh focht RW AVS too S mV O0 mV in 0 8 mV increments Hue y o ino Adjusts the hue of the RW 180 to 180 0 incoming digital video signal Frame Sync Name Description Type Options 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 151 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer Demultiplexer Modules Name Description Type Options Processed Horizontal Phase us Adjusts the horizontal RW e 0 000 us to 29 616 Outputs gt timing us 1080p 30 1035i Frame Sync 60 e 0 000 us to 14 808 us 1080p 60 080p 60 DL e 0 000 us to 29 646 us 1080p 29 1080i 59 e 0 000 us to 14 823 us 1080p 59 1080p 59 94 DL e 0 000 us to 35 542 us 1080p 25 1080i 50
237. roprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 94 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Signal Presence and LEDs Each of the channels on the Output Module provide signal presence reporting via card edge LEDs and the control software Both have the ability to be disabled or enabled through the control software along with a user selectable hysteresis period SYSTEM POWER ACT CTRL ACT OUT sen 23 OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT v OUTPUT Es 2 OUTPUT 2 OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT 24Ndc 30W PX OB FM 161 100462Q000 REN A xe ECCE MS 0 o Cumt FAIL SAFE 1 2 ih uu DLG a DCie 4 4 5 rE a HET P LEI Figure 41 System LEDs on PX OB Output Module System LEDs There are 3 system indicator LEDs on the front edge of the module Table 44 Module System LEDs y sw MCA ac we a A Output Modules PX OB H Aem JTAG RESET bm CS c02 Wa V os U aa H cs rcs LED DESCRIPTION OUTPUT 1 16 Signal Presence 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 95 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Output Modules PX OB LED DESCRIPTION Green Signal Present POWER T Power Supply indicator Green 24V power rails are operational ACT CTRL Active Control Red Initi
238. rosspoint receive and process audio signals simultaneously Functionality The TDM Audio Crosspoint Module provides the following functionality 16 20 24 bit Audio Processing The Audio TDM architecture supports processing of 16 bit 20 bit and 24 bit audio samples Bits per sample are automatically detected by the TDM architecture Transitions When switching between 2 audio signals transitions such as V Fade Fade Cut Cut Fade and Synchronous are supported Transition type and duration are assigned on a per output basis Quiet Switching Quiet switching between two audio signals is supported as a predefined transition type Quiet switching is implemented as a v fade of two signals with minimum duration Synchronous Switching AES streams are switched synchronously at the AES frame boundary with respect to a DARS 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 74 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Audio TDM Crosspoint Module PX ATDM64 X28 Asynchronous Signals Asynchronous inputs are re sampled to a common reference frequency to avoid periodic adding dropping of samples Level Adjustment TDM Input Output Modules support audio level adjustment from 30dBFS to 3dBFS From 3OdBFS to 0 adjustments will occur in O 5dBFS increments and adjust in 0 33dBFS increments from 0 to 3dBFS Sample Rate Conversion SRC The Audio TDM Crosspoint does not Sample Rate Convert SRC
239. rt fields will be set accordingly by default Click Add Rows Selected View IP3 Database Save estinations MON IN 1 MON IN 2 MON IN 3 MON IN 4 Validate Resync More Add Insert Update Remove IP3 B EXT Slot 6 Port 1 IP3 B EXT Slot 6 Port 2 TP3 B EXT Slot 7 Port 1 IP3 B EXT Slot 7 Port 2 Add Monitoring Router Destinations In the Sources tab click the Add button Add Sources Enter the number of Sources to create 16 Create Sources using the following template Name Prefix Name Index Alias OM 1 lunam Device Type HD Video Video Starting Location Frame Location Type IP3 B OUT Maximum number of Video Ports per module Use Name Index Long Name Breakaway Source m Port Port 1 Description Channel Video 1 Maximum number of Video Channels per Port 1 Enter 16 as number of Sources to create Recommended Change the name in the Name Prefix field to visually distinguish this from other sources For example include OM in the name prefix Select a Video Device Type and select the appropriate Frame Set Location Type to OUT Select Slot as Slot 1 Port as Port 1 Note This is to map the Slot 1 OUT 1 8 ports and Slot 2 OUT 1 8 ports Click Add Rows 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 240 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Output Monitoring Modules You will see 8 destin
240. rted in the initial release of Platinum IP3 If coaxial XY protocol is required in a system the Imagine Communications EDGE Router Protocol Translator can be used to interface coaxial XY networks with the Platinum IP3 Control System Serial Ports Note The rear of the Platinum IP3 frame has 2 RS232 RS422 Ports that do not support the XY protocol in the Platinum IP3 System Release 1 0 If Serial XY protocol is required in a system the EDGE Router Protocol Translator can be used to interface serial XY with the Platinum IP3Control System 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 45 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual RSS 232 Pin Assignments Table 15 RS 232 Signal Format Pin Assignments Pin Function Frame Ground RxD Data received by router TxD Data sent by router Data Terminal Ready Ground Data Set Ready DSR Request to Send RTS Clear to Send RTS VD 1 OI NI aD wm HR wl ni er Frame Ground Pins 4 and 6 connected internally Pins 7 and 8 connected internally RSS 422 Pin Assignments Table 16 RS 422 Signal Format Pin Assignments Pin Signal Tributary Description Geen eege 1 FG Frame ground Frame ground 2 Ta Tx Transmitted data Ra Rx 7 Tb Txt twisted pair Rb Rx 6 Tc Received data shield Received data shield 8 Ra Rx
241. s The PX IB Input Module combines with the following back modules e PX HSR9C IBG Input Module on page 103 e PX HSR9O IBG Input Module on page 103 e PX HSR9C1D IBG Input Module on page 104 e PX HSR9O1D IBG Input Module on page 105 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 80 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Input Modules PX IB The PX IB module accepts the following inputs Table 36 PX IB Input Options Back Module Type Number of Inputs HD BNC Nine Electrical Inputs SFP optical Nine Optical Inputs PX IB Expansion The PX IB module can also be used with specific back modules intended for expansion It provides the following for extension e Looping output of all inputs to extend the routing system to More than 512 outputs Platinum More than 1024 outputs Platinum IP3 in multiple frames form factor See e PX HSR9C1D IBG Input Module on page 104 e PX HSR901D IBG Input Module on page 105 Inserting Input Modules into the Platinum IP3 frame Each Input Module may be inserted into or extracted from a Platinum IP3 frame while the frame is powered and functioning The system Controller will recognize the addition or removal of an Input Module from any of the Input Module slots and will update the change automatically When the Controller recognizes the addition of an Input Module it will allow the user to control the
242. s Input Matrix ExparislOrn ceca rice aene retour rate rete ee Ne EE e uito dd 29 Combined Input and Output Matrix Expansion eese esses esee enema 30 Alarms and LEDS secs c O S 30 Control i um d 31 Platinum Is Copntroller e cate ceuttGencetecese enetdcaunn EE CeegedrE edd e EN IN EE 32 Modules e ET ER Input arid OUTPUT tel EE 32 List of Supported Input and Output Modules essere enne en nennen nente 32 Rear Gre Te TR eto ELTE EO TL DL II E LTD LLL DID 34 OUTPUT ele TEE 34 INDUE Rear elle e 34 Expansion Modules 5 eere cite restes ce ese cedere Tee aR Ee Eeee eE AEE TEENER 34 Crossp int ModUlES sciis 34 Monitoring Modules rereana rinena E Ea EEE E EARE aE aA EAE EEEE ATE REEERE 35 Output Monitoring Modules cccccccessssssseseceeecessesssaeseceeecesseseaeeseceescessesaaseseeeescessesasaeeeeeesensseseeaeess 35 Multiviewer MOodul6 aec etienne ro an roca cenae P etu ate E denn cx resa de na TER ERA RU Ee RR aA stares 35 Resource Module PFS E 36 Resource Module PX RES Overvlew 36 PX RES in a Platinum Bn Ch E 36 PX RES Parameters and Upgrades ederin iedee siise deekie denaii 38 PX RES Redundancy eene nnnethanas sisse sent rasa iss s essa sess assa sss senses aaa sa asse nan 38 Communications Back Panel DN CRD 39 User INTE Ez e E
243. s parity and CRC bits and then encodes the data into biphase AES signals Two copies of the first eight AES signals are provided as AC coupled LVDS for distribution to the wideband Platinum crosspoints The FPGA also provides a TDM version of all sixteen AES signals for distribution to the audio specific crosspoint module s Reporting Each channel will provide standard reporting of signal presence using card edge mounted LEDs e The green signal presence LEDs labeled Input 1 to Input 16 are located in a row on the front of the input module Each of these LEDs illuminates when a signal is detected on its corresponding input e The red signal clipping LEDs labeled Input 1 to Input 16 are located in a row on the front of the input module Each of these LEDs illuminates when a signal on the input exceeds the maximum input amplitude or level adjust available through TDM scales the digital signal beyond AES limits In addition the usual three system LEDs are included Operating Modes The PM ADCT IB PT ADCT IB operates in one of three modes External internal and auto mode e In external mode all necessary sampling clocks are derived from an external AES reference DARS The resulting AES streams generated from the sampled analog audio inputs will be locked in both frequency and phase to this external reference e n internal mode all necessary sampling clocks are derived from internal oscillators These oscillators have been c
244. s e Yes Dolby E Detection Allows Dolby E detection RW e Non Audio Channel based on presence of Status Bit Only Dolby E Header Can be e Dolby Header used with or without Detection Status Bitcarrecton Jr Dolby Header Detection with Cbit See Dolby E Detection Correction on page 158 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 148 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer Demultiplexer Modules Audio Name Description Type Options Processed Group Presence Reports the presence of e Group 1 Outputs gt the specified audio e Group 2 Audio group in the SDI signal e Group 12 e Group 3 e Group 13 e Group 23 e Group 123 e Group 4 e Group 14 e Group 24 e Group 124 e Group 34 e Group 134 e Group 234 TDM Audio Enables embedding of RW e Yes Audio Channels received e No from the ATDM board Each instance of this control applies to all 16 Mono Channels of Audio or 8 Stereo pairs of an SDI stream If set to Yes only those TDM channels which are connected in the Audio cross point s matrix will be embedded into the outgoing SDI stream Disconnected Stereo pairs will be automatically replaced by whatever has been de embedded from the incoming SDI stream ADS Clean Enables and disables the BW e Yes cleaning of the Ancillary e No Data Space before embedding audio 2015 Imagine Commun
245. s for the MADI signal All TDM channels are muted and inactive No input present 56 or 64 channels 64 channels allocated on the TDM bus for the MADI signal All TDM channels are muted and inactive 32 channel input 32 channels 32 channels allocated on the TDM bus for the MADI signal All channels within input signal are passed 32 channel input 56 or 64 channels 64 channels allocated on the TDM bus for the MADI signal Channels within input signal are passed The uppermost 32 TDM channels are muted and inactive 56 channel input 32 channels 32 channels allocated on the TDM bus for the MADI signal Channels 1 through 32 of input signal are passed 56 channel input 56 or 64 channels 64 channels allocated on the TDM bus for the MADI signal All channels of input signal are passed Uppermost 8 TDM channels are muted and inactive 64 channel input 32 channels 32 channels allocated on the TDM bus for the MADI signal Channels 1 through 32 of input signal are passed 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 170 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Multichannel Audio Digital Interface MADI Modules 64 channel input 56 channels e 64 channels allocated on the TDM bus for the MADI signal e Channels 1 through 56 of input signal are passed e Uppermost 8 TDM channels are muted and inactive 64 channel input 64 channels e 64
246. t 9 on page 278 Output 13 Output 14 Output 15 Output 16 on page 278 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 276 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Module LEDs Input Module LEDs Input 1 and Input 2 INPUT 1 and INPUT 2 flash to indicate abnormal hardware status in the slot Note that they are NOT turning on off at the same time Input 3 Input 4 Input 5 These LED inputs indicate module configuration Table 123 LED Inputs 3 4 5 INPUT INPUT INPUT 3 4 5 Description OFF ON OFF e Front Module is SD 270Mbps only Works only with specific Back Modules designed for the Platinum system ON ON OFF e Front Module is SD HD 3G Works only with specific Back Modules designed for the Platinum system OFF OFF ON Front Module is SD 270Mbps only Works only with specific Back Modules designed for the IP3 system ON OFF ON e Front Module is SD HD 3G Works only with specific Back Modules designed for the Platinum system Input 6 Input 7 Input 8 Input 9 These LED inputs indicate Back Module types Table 124 LED Inputs 6 7 8 9 INPUT INPUT 7 PUT DEUT Description 6 8 9 ON ON ON ON e No Back Module installed at the back of this slot OR e Front Module not correctly mated with Back Module OFF OFF OFF OFF e Back Module contains 9x HD BNC connectors ON OFF OFF OFF e Back Module contains 1x DensiSh
247. t Video Standard 525i 59 94 1080i 59 94 1080i 60 e 1080i 60 1080p 59 94 1080p 30 e 1080p 60 1080p 29 97 e 1080p 30 720p 59 94 e 720p 60 525i 59 94 e 1080p 60 DL 1080p 59 94 DL 625i 50 1080i 50 1080i 59 94 e 1080i 59 94 1080p 50 1080p 29 97 e 1080p 29 97 1080p 25 e 1080p 59 94 720p 50 e 720p 59 94 625i 50 e 525i 59 94 1080p 50 DL e 1080p 59 94 DL 720p 60 720p 60 1080i 50 e 1080i 50 1080p 60 1080p 25 e 1080p 50 1080p 60 DL e 1080p 25 e 720p 50 e 625i 50 e 1080p 50DL 720p 59 94 720p 59 94 1080p 24 e 1080p24 1080p 59 94 1080sF 24 e 1080sF 24 1080p 59 94 DL 720p 50 720p 50 1080p 23 98 e 1080p 23 98 1080p 50 1080sF 23 98 e 1080sF 23 98 1080p 50 DL In both Sync mode and Delay mode PT FSDMX provides several controls to manipulate the output video signal e Horizontal timing e Vertical timing e Adjustable frame delay e Manually freeze output video on first or second field interlaced standards or on the whole frame all standards Audio Synchronization By default PT FSDMX IBG and PT FSDMXO IBG synchronize de embedded audio with timing information from the video frame synchronizer prior to re embedding the audio 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 115 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer Demultiplexer Modules When Pair Delay Track is set to sync tracking the audio will be automatically delayed to match the vi
248. t module and 2 Dual Rx SFPs 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 175 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual PT MADI4X IBG Parameters Note SFP Parameters are applicable to the Optical module only PT MADI4X IBG Parameters Multichannel Audio Digital Interface MADI Modules Functional Block Parameter Name R W Description Options General Serial Number R Displays the module s unique lt String gt identifier Temperature R FPGA V6 temperature lt String gt in degrees celsius Parameter Hysteresis R W Parameter updated time lt Integer gt 2000000 us Software Version R Embedded software version lt String gt Control FPGA Version R Control FPGA design version String Processing FPGA Version R Processing FPGA design lt String gt version Input Type R Input signal media type BNC Optical TDM Locking Sync Select R W Sync Source Synci Sync2 Sync3 GenLock Present R Indicates the GenLock signal No present Yes GenLock Locked R Genlock is locked No Yes GenLock Standard R GenLock Standard Unknown 525i 59 94 625i 50 720p 25 720p 29 97 720p 30 720p 50 720p 59 94 720p 60 1080p 23 98 1080p 24 1080p 29 97 1080p 30 1080p 25 1080i 50 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 176 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual
249. tains relative vertical interval switching until a reference is detected Also See Switch Triggering on page 48 Alarm Port Reserved for future use LTC Bi Directional Port Reserved for future use LEDs The following LEDs are present on the module e Power e Active Card e Ethernet 1 Activity LED e Ethernet 2 Activity LED e 2 Alarm LEDs Table 14 LEDs on the Resource Module LED DESCRIPTION POWER e Power Supply Indicator Green When lit this indicates that 24V is enabled on this board ENET1 LINK Green Indicates there is an active connection on Ethernet Port 1 ENET2 LINK Green Indicates there is an active connection on Ethernet Port 2 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 42 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Resource Module PX RES LED DESCRIPTION ALARM1 Off e ALARM2 LED blinks amber when synchronization between ALARM2 Red the active and standby PX RES is in progress Amber e ALARM2 LED turns red if the synchronization process fails Flashing Red e ALARM1 LED blinks amber when a user sets the frame Flashing Amber identifying LLDC parameter e ALARM1 is lit amber when the PX RES is in fail safe mode ACTRES This module is the Active Resource Module controlling the frame and communicating to the Ethernet ports 2015 Imagine Communications Corp SPEAKER Propriet
250. tal number of PT FSDX8C1D modules in frame Parameters 4 PT FSDX8C1D IBG Parameters and Faults Faults Serial Number 0123456789 License Key 4G9065Q4DUG8UK Licensed Options Frame Sync Temperature Show Table Fan Status Show Table FPGA 1 DDR Status PT FSDX8C1D IBG Parameters are similar to PT FSDMX IBG PT FSDMXO IBG on which it is based See PT FSDMX IBG Controllable Parameters on page 116 PT FSDX8C1D IBG Specifications Specifications are identical to PT FSDMX IBG Specifications on page 128 Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice Table 72 PT FSDX8C1D IBG Specifications Item Specification Number of inputs 8 Connector BNC IEC169 8 Impedance 750 Number of outputs 1 Connector DensiShield Impedance 100 Odifferential SD SDI 270Mb s SMPTE 259M Format 525i59 94 625i50 Return loss 18 dB from 5 MHz to 270 MHz Equalization Adaptive cable equalization for up to 984 ft See Equalization Information on page 133 300m typical of Belden 8281 coaxial cable 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 132 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer Demultiplexer Modules Item HD SDI 1 5Gb s Specification SMPTE 292M Format and image sample structure SMPTE274M 1080i 1080sF 1080p SMPTE296M 720p
251. tallation and Operation Manual Table 107 PT ENC OB Specifications Analog Composite Video Modules Item Specification Number of outputs 8 Output connector 75Q BNC per IEC 169 8 Impedance 750 Signal type NTSC PAL Output amplitude 1 0Vp p 10 Return loss gt 40 dB DC to 5 75 MHz Filtering CCIR 601 compliant Resolution 10 bits Frequency response 0 05 dB to 5 2 MHz Differential gain lt 0 8 Differential phase lt 0 6 Bulk delay lt 80 us Signal to noise ratio RMS gt 65 dB unified weighting DC offset O V 0 025 V Power Consumption Table 108 PT ENC OB Power Consumption Power Consumption 10W 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 236 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Output Monitoring Modules Output Monitoring Modules PX HSRAEC OM Output Monitoring Module The PX HSRAEC OM is a 3G SDI HD SDI SD SDI output monitoring module for the IP3 Frame The module is designed to provide an output interface to monitor an output stream or preview an input stream as selected by the control system The PX HSRAEC OM is a dual slot card and it occupies slots 6 and 7 at the rear of the IP3 Frame PX HSRAEC OM Output Monitoring Module I r SSS SS or CREE 0 IN 1 Leed PWRCTRL LZ OUT A For Video there are 8 HD BNC
252. tereo Audio Device Type the Audio channel must be kept at Audio 1 while incrementing the Port number between Left and Right audio channels For example for stereo audio channel 1 ensure the assignments are Port 1 Audio 1 left and Port 2 Audio 1 right 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 173 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Multichannel Audio Digital Interface MADI Modules For stereo audio channel 2 ensure the assignments are Port 3 Audio 1 left and Port 4 Audio 1 right E 04 Close MU LL EE Main Database Sources Destinations x Undo Redo Add Insert Update Remove Save Validate oC i HD Video Hybrid Slot 44 Port 2 HD Video Hybrid Slot 44 Port 3 HD Video Hybrid Slot 44 Port 4 HD Video Hybrid Slot 44 Port 5 HD Video Hybrid Slot 44 Port 6 HD Video Hybnd Slot 44 Port 7 Hybrid Slot 44 Port 8 MADI 1 MADI 1 MADI 1 lex Stereo Audio Hybrid Slot 16 Port 1 MADI 2 MADI 2 MADI 2 Multipl stereo Audio Hybnd Slot 16 Port 3 MADI 3 MADI 3 MADI 3 ultiple ereo Audio Hybrid Slot 16 Port 5 MADI 4 MADI 4 MADI 4 Multiplex Stereo Audio Hybnd Slot 16 Port 7 MADI 5 MADI 5 MADI 5 Multiplex Stereo Audio Hybrid Slot 16 Port 9 MADI 6 MADI 6 M 6 Multiplex Ste Audio Hybnd Slot 16 Port 11 MADI 7 MADI 7 Multiplex Stereo Audio Hybnd Slot 16 Port 13 MADI 7 7 A Hybrid Slot 16 Port 13 Audio 1 MADI 7 Audio Hybrid Slot 16 Port 14 Audio 1 Hybrid Slot 16 Port 13 A
253. that are connected using DensiShield cables For example if you route the Inputs of one Frame to a second Frame you have twice the original number of Outputs 2048 If you route the Inputs to 2 frames you have three times the number of Outputs 3072 576x2048 system 576x3072 system 76 in 576x1024 24 ou e 576x1024 576x1024 Matrix Matrix Matrix 576x1024 Matrix 576x1024 Matrix 576x1024 Matrix Figure 6 Matrix Expansion Input Matrix Expansion Input Matrix Expansion is achieved by cross connecting Output Modules across frames This allows for an increased number of Inputs available for routing to each Output Through Input Matrix expansion you can build e A 1152x1024 router across 2 frames e A 1728x1024 router across 3 frames e A 2304x1024 router across 4 frames 1152x1024 system 1728x1024 system 2304x1024 system 576x1024 576x1024 E 576x1024 Matrix Matrix Matrix 576x1024 Matrix 576x1024 576x1024 Matrix Matrix 576x1024 76 576x1024 Matrix X Matrix 576x1024 Matrix Figure 7 System Expansion 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 29 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Introduction Combined Input and Output Matrix Expansion The techniques of Input and Output Matrix Expansion can be combined to produce very large routing systems Some of the possible configurations are detailed below Consult Imagine Communications C
254. the SDI signals that e SD becomes one of the e HD unprocessed outputs e 3G RW Reclocked Output Swing Used to set the output id e 1600mV For Back modules swing Default is 800mV featuring electrical unprocessed outputs only Enables Disables RW Reclocked Output Mute Po RS electrical BNC output e Yes For Back modules featuring electrical unprocessed outputs only Enables or disables fiber RW Reclocked Laser Enable 2 i e wes optical output e No For Back modules featuring optical unprocessed outputs only Reports laser status RO Reclocked Laser Status B 2 e Normal e Failed For Back modules e Disabled featuring optical unprocessed outputs NoSFP only Notes Word Length Parameter The Word Length parameter can be set through the Audio section of the GUI to 16 20 or 24 bits on a per SDI channel basis 20 bits is the default and is applicable when the video standard is SD SDI 525 625 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 157 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer Demultiplexer Modules If the SD SDI Video has extended Audio packets which can apply to any of up to four groups of embedded Audio Audio data embedded in such group s should have a word length of 24 bits When the processed audio data word length is 20 bits determined by parameter Word Length parameter the Audio Embedder cannot overwr
255. the audio signals SRC is done on the Input Audio TDM modules Audio sampled at 32 kHz to 96 kHz can be Sample Rate Converted to 48 kHz and locked to the Digital Audio Reference Signals DARS connected to the Platinum IP3 frame Tone Generator Audio TDM Input Output Modules can generate valid AES silence 500Hz tone and 1KHz tone Polarity Reversal Audio TDM Input Output Modules provide a means to correct inverted audio polarity due to incorrect wiring in the analog domain Channels Swapping and Summing Audio TDM Input Output Modules provide the ability to exchange Left for Right or vice versa of an AES stereo pair They also provide the ability to average two stereo pairs into a single mono channel Redundancy There are 2 slots in the Platinum IP3 frame for TDM Audio Crosspoint Modules One is the primary and the second redundant shadows all operations of the primary board The redundant module becomes active within one video frame of an error occurring or with removal of the active board The ATDM modules in conjunction with the Resource Module PX RES determine which slot contains the Active module The modules report their current status primary or secondary to the control system Appropriate watchdog circuitry on the module and or status monitoring on the Resource Module will monitor the status of the primary module It is not necessary to remove the primary module to cause the secondary module to become active 2015 I
256. ti format video audio and embedded audio routing within a single flexible frame The Platinum IP3 routing switcher system provides matrix expandability beyond 8x8 to 576x1024 in a single frame The 8x8 building block provides ideal growth and flexibility for mixed applications such as high definition and serial digital interface and other integrated processing opportunities such as analog and or digital conversion With its ability to route signals ranging from 3 0 Mb s to 2 97 Gb s the IP3 router offers a clear growth path from lower bit rate signals to high bandwidth high definition format signals This router will also handle both AES and polarity sensitive ASI SSI signal formats The Platinum IP3Router is available in the following frame size 28 RU PX FR 28 frame supporting matrices up to 576x1024 Features e Routing for Large Systems 576x1024 in a single 28RU frame 1152x1024 in two 28RU frames 576x2048 in two 28RU frames 1152x2048 in four 28RU frames 1152x3072 in six 28RU frames e Video Routing HD SDI digital multirate from 3 00 Mb s to 2 97 Gb s Digital video signals including SMPTE 310 SDI ASI HD SDI Analog video via conversion to from SDI on I O modules e Audio Routing 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 17 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Introduction Digital audio signals including balanced and unbalanced coaxial AES Analog stereo audio via con
257. tions Sync Select Selects which physical RW el sync port the module ES uses as a reference 8d Genlock Video Present Reports the presence of RO e No the reference video e Yes signal Genlock Video Locked Reports the locked RO e No status of the reference e Yes video signal Genlock Standard Indicates the video RO e Unknown standard detected on e 525i 59 94 the genlock input e 625i 50 e 720p 25 e 720p 29 97 e 720p 30 e 720p 50 e 720p 59 94 e 720p 60 e 1080p 23 98 e 1080p 24 e 1080p 29 97 e 1080p 30 e 1080p 25 e 1080i 50 e 1080i 59 94 e 1080i 60 e 1080sF 23 98 e 1080sF 24 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 118 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer Demultiplexer Modules Parameters and Faults View Parameters Faults 4 PT FSDMX IBG Syne Seleni Sync 1 General GenLock Video Present No Version GenLock Video Locked No GenLock Standard Unknown Figure 55 Genlock Parameters Input Parameters Table 65 PT FSDMX IBG Input Parameters Name Description Type Options VIDEO SDI Video Standard x 8 Displays the SDI video RO e Unknown signal standard e 525i 59 94 e 625i 50 e 720p 25 e 720p 29 97 e 720p 30 e 720p 50 e 720p 59 94 e 720p 60 e 1080p 23 98 e 1080p 24 e 1080p 29 97 e 1080p 30 e 1080p 25 e 1080i 5
258. tions tab Click the Add button to add the 8 processed outputs Use the HD Embedded device type add logical destinations for the 8 processed outputs Enter 8 for the number of Destinations to create Ensure the Slot number corresponds to the Slot that contains your HSR module Change the Name prefix to clearly identify these as Processed outputs for example ProcX Ensure the Index is set to 1 This adds 8 Outputs Ports 1 8 with 1 video Video 1 and 16 Audio Audio 1 15 channels Check that the entries have been correctly created in the upper and lower panes IP3 Routing System Configuration Database Editor Main Database Destinations Insert Update Remove Save Validate Resync ocation TP3 Test Bernard Slot 32 Port 9 TP3 Test Bernard Slot 20 Port 1 TP3 Test Bernard Slot 20 Port 2 IP3 Test Bernard Slot 20 Port 3 TP3 Test Bernard Slot 20 Port 1 Video 1 0 TP3 Test Bernard Slot 20 Port 1 Audio 1 1 TP3 Test Bernard Slot 20 Port 1 Audio 2 2 TP3 Test Bernard Slot 20 Port 1 Audio 3 3 TP3 Test Bernard Slot 20 Port 1 Audio 4 4 TP3 Test Bernard Slot 20 Port 1 Audio 5 5 TP3 Test Bernard Slot 20 Port 1 Audio6 6 TP3 Test Bernard Slot 20 Port 1 Audio 7 TP3 Test Bernard Slot 20 Port 1 Audio 8 8 TP3 Test Bernard Slot 20 Port 1 Audio 9 9 TP3 Test Bernard Slot 20 Port 1 Audio 10 TD Tact Rarnsrd Clat 201 Beet 1 Audi 11 Click the Add button again to add the 8 unprocessed outputs Note Unprocessed outputs are available on the sam
259. to Detect Mux Always On Bypass F S Mux Stat rame Sync Mux Status Retes operational RW FS Ext Lock mode status based on license mode of operation presence and rate of Reference signal FS Local Lock FS Delay Forced FS Delay Rate Mismatch 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 153 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer Demultiplexer Modules Name Description Type Options Audio Group Name Description Type Options Processed Active Channels Indicates which channels RO e None Outputs gt are active e CH1 Audio Group e CH2 e CH12 e CH3 e CH13 e CH23 e CH123 e CH4 e CH14 e CH24 e CH124 e CH34 e CH134 e CH234 e CH1234 DeEmbed Control Specifies the operation RW e Mute of the audio de e Repeat embedder when an error occurs it will either repeat the last audio sample or mute when an error occurs See DeEmbed Control on page 158 Embedding Mode Selects the embedding RW e Off mode for the specified e Append audio group e OverWrite e Auto 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 154 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Audio Stereo Pair Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer Demultiplexer Modules
260. transport stream is locked to the same reference as the TDM receiver Using the TDM reference for MADI default option If you select the same reference for MADI as for TDM Same as TDM Ref option non PCM data such as Dolby E or Dolby D can also be encapsulated into the MADI transport stream Using a separate non TDM reference for MADI Parameters and Faults View Parameters MADI Reference Source MADI Reference Present 4 PT MADI4C OBG General Same as TDM Ref No S Synci TDM Locking MADI Reference Standard MADI Locking Sync2 Sync3 MADI Output Same as TDM Ref 000000000000 Unknown TDM Input If the reference signal for MADI is different than the one used for TDM locking channels conveying non PCM data such as Dolby E D are destroyed Non PCM data becomes unusable because of a sample rate conversion process that transfers received TDM data into a new clock domain MADI As a workaround for example when you need to lock the TDM data to a video reference lock the MADI audio data to an unrelated 48kHz DARS reference 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 181 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Multichannel Audio Digital Interface MADI Modules TDM Input The TDM Input section reports on audio presence and format for each of the 128 mono audio channels that can be received by the TDM receiver Possible Audio formats are PCM non PCM Dolby E
261. tries such as a DOS entry or something you type into a field gt Indicates the direction of navigation through a hierarchy of menus and windows hyperlink Indicates a jump to another location within the electronic document or elsewhere Internet address Indicates a jump to a Web site or URL Note Indicates important information that helps to avoid and troubleshoot problems Obtaining Documents Product support documents can be viewed or downloaded from our website Alternatively contact your Customer Service representative to request a document Unpacking Shipping Information Unpacking a Product This product was carefully inspected tested and calibrated before shipment to ensure years of stable and trouble free service 1 Check equipment for any visible damage that may have occurred during transit Confirm that you have received all items listed on the packing list Contact your dealer if any item on the packing list is missing Contact the carrier if any item is damaged Ste QU 9 Remove all packaging material from the product and its associated components before you install the unit Keep at least one set of original packaging in the event that you need to return a product for servicing Returning a Product In the unlikely event that your product fails to operate properly please contact Customer Service to obtain a Return Authorization RA number and then send the unit back for servicin
262. ualization Adaptive cable equalization for up to 984 HD SDI 1 5Gb s ft 300m typical of Belden 8281 coaxial cable SMPTE 292M Format and image sample structure SMPTE274M 1080i 1080sF 1080p SMPTE296M 720p Return loss gt 18 dB typical from 5 MHz to 1485 MHz Equalization Adaptive cable equalization for up to 590 ft 180 m typical of Belden 1694A co axial cable HD SDI 3Gb s SMPTE 424M Format and image sample SMPTE 425M Level A structure SMPTE 372M Return loss 15 dB typical from 5 MHz to 1485 MHz 10 dB typical from 1485 MHz to 2970 MHz Equalization Adaptive cable equalization for up to 328 ft 100 m typical of Belden 1694A co axial cable Table 69 PT FSDMXO IBG Sp ecifications Item Specification Number of inputs 8 Package 4x Dual Channel Receiver SFP Modules Connector LC with PC UPC polish Wavelengths 1260nm 1620nm Receiver sensitivity 23dBm PIN Receiver Supported video rates 270Mb s 1 5Gb s 3Gb s Supported formats and sampling structures See Electrical Input Specification 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 129 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer Demultiplexer Modules Power Consumption Table 70 PT FSDMX IBG Power Consumption 24V Power Rail 50W 5V P
263. udio 1 Hybrid Slot 16 Port 13 Audio 1 OK Figure 78 MADI Stereo Audio Configuration Input Specifications PT MADIAO IBG Specifications Table 78 Optical Input Specifications Item Specification Number of Inputs 4 Fiber Type Multi mode Package 2x Dual Channel Receiver SFP modules 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 174 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Multichannel Audio Digital Interface MADI Modules Item Specification Connector LC with PC UPC polish Wavelength Wideband 1250nm 1380nm Receiver Sensitivity 30dBm PIN Receiver Link rate 125Mbit s 4B5B encoded NRZI Qualified devices Optoway SPM 3102W 2RG PT MADI4C IBG Specifications Table 79 Electrical Input Specifications Item Specification Number of Inputs 4 Connector BNC IEC169 8 Impedance 75 Input Level 150mV to 600mV Link rate 125Mbit s 4B5B encoded NRZI Return Loss NA Equalization Adaptive cable equalization for up to 984 ft 300m typical of Belden 8281 coaxial cable Input Power Consumption Power Consumption Table 80 PT MADIAC IBG Power Consumption Power Consumption 15W includes front module and back module Power Consumption Table 81 PT MADI40 IBG Power Consumption Power Consumption 18W includes fron
264. um IP3 Installation and Operation Manual AES Balanced Coaxial Modules with TDM Capability Parameter Description Options Swap Copy 1 16 Table Parameter Swap Copy left and right audio channels NOTE This parameter is always applied after summing e No swap e Swap left and right e Copy left to right Copy right to left Level Adjust 1 32 Table Parameter Indicates gain attenuation applied to mono channel 1 OdB to 30 dB in 0 5 dB increments Summing 1 16 Table Parameter Add left and right audio samples divide by 2 NOTE This parameter is always applied before swap copy e No summing e Right to left e Leftto right Both Transition 1 16 Table Parameter Determines type of transition on a given destination e Quiet switch V fade Fade cut Cut fade e Synchronous switch Duration 1 16 Table Parameter Determines transition length e No duration Shortest Short e Medium short Medium e Medium long e Long e Longest 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 220 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual AES Balanced Coaxial Modules with TDM Capability Parameters and Faults Parameters 4 PT AEST OB enne Show Table Out Polarity Reversal Show Table Crosspoint Type TDM Disconnect State Silence Lock Detect Show Table Phase Alarm Show Table
265. upply Frame Figure 107 Power Zones 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 249 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual 1500 Watt Power Supply and External Power Supply Frame Power Supplies PX PS The IP3 Frame PX FR 28 comes with 4 Power Supplies PX PS 2 at the top of the frame at each corner and 2 at the bottom of the frame at each corner The PX PS Power Supply provides up to 1500W of power You can optionally install 4 additional power supplies 2 at the top of the frame and 2 at the bottom of the frame for a total of 8 Power Supplies in the Frame See Installing Power Supplies on page 256 for instructions on installing additional power supplies Power Supply Modes The Power Switch on the front of the power supply puts the power supply into Standby mode or ON mode e In Standby mode the power supply is energized internally but not driving power into the frame e In ON mode the power supply is supplying power to frame Once an AC power cord is attached to a power supply its becomes energized partially operational internally Power Supply LEDs There are four LEDs on the front of the power supply 5V 24V AC and FAN which are used to indicate failure on the DC and AC power rails or Fan failure Note The R 1500 Power Supplies are hot pluggable Optional Power Supply2 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential F
266. ustomer Support for specific configuration guidance on very large systems 1152x3072 system 1728x2048 system 2304x2048 system 576x1024 576x1024 E DN M Matrix 576x1024 576x1024 Matrix Ll Matrix 2 B 576x1024 Matrix 576x1024 DN 2 Matrix BN 576x1024 E Matrix x e 576x1024 576x1024 Matrix 576x1024 7 576x1024 EE Matrix LE 576x1024 b Matrix 576x1024 Matrix 576x1024 Matrix 576x1024 Matrix 576x1024 Matrix Matrix 576x1024 Matrix 576x1024 Matrix Figure 8 Combined Matrix and System Expansion Note Audio Matrix Expansion for fully non blocking configurations is only supported between two Platinum IP3 frames Alarms and LEDs Status LEDs on power supply units resource cards and various input output modules are visible when the door is open Alarms on various modules are reported to the Platinum IP3 Controller to ease hardware management of the system LED indicators reflect the status of sub systems inside the frame The indicators for each power supply provide information on each voltage rail and the power supply s fan The indicators from each resource module provide status information of the frame s resource module These indicators are lit green when the system is functioning properly and red if a failure condition exists For details on Alarms and LEDs see e Module LEDs on page 276 e Alarm Expansion Module PX ALARM on page 51
267. ut is shorted e Over current on corresponding 24VDC output e Under voltage on corresponding 24VDC output e Fuse blown on corresponding 24VDC output FAN OFF Power switch is off or AC power is not present Solid GREEN The fan is operating normally Flashing RED at 2 Hz Fan failure detected Could also be used to indicate over temperature Power Connector Pinout Table 116 Power Connector Pinout ELCON Model 298 08 01100 Pin eg SE Nomenclature Re E Signal 1 35A 18A Line Input Black AC Line 2 35A N A Neutral White AC Return 3 35A 31A 24A Red 24V Supply 4 35A 31A 24A Green 24V Return 6 10A 10mA 12C Orange CLK 8 10A 4A 5 Red 5V Supply 9 10A 10mA 24 A Fail C Green Opto Collector 10 10A 10mA 24 A Fail E Purple Opto Emitter 12 10A 10mA 5 Fail C Blue Opto Collector 13 10A 10mA 5 Fail E Brown Opto Emitter 15 10A 10mA 12C Green DATA 18 10A 10mA Fan Fail C Black Opto Collector 19 10A 10mA Fan Fail E Gray Opto Emitter 20 10A 4A 5 Black 5V Return 21 10A 10mA 24B Fail C Red Opto Collector 22 10A 10mA 24B Fail E Orange Opto Emitter 24 10A 1mA Chassis Sense Violet Power Level Detect 26 35A 31A 24B Orange 24V Supply 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 260 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual 1500 Watt Power Supply and External Power Supply Frame Rated
268. utput 2B H gt Output 3A gt Output 3B gt Output 4A gt Output 4B H gt Output 5A gt Output 5B H gt Output 6A gt Output 6B Input5 Input 6 Input 7 H Output 7A gt Output 7B H gt Output 8A Output 8B Bidirectional frame control ENET Control signals PIPE Logic Power failure monitoring 24VA Power On board from frame supply 24VB Card health and signal presence LEDs Figure 102 PT DEC IB Functional Block Diagram Specifications Specifications and designs are subject to change without notice Table 104 PT DEC IB Specifications Item Specification Number of inputs 8 Input connector 75Q BNC per IEC 169 8 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 230 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Analog Composite Video Modules Item Specification Impedance 75Q Signal type NTSC PAL Input coupling DC coupled Maximum input amplitude 2 0 Vpp Nominal input amplitude 1 0 Vp p 10 Return loss Better than 40 dB DC to 5 75 MHz Clamping Automatic Quantization 10 bits Filter Five line adaptive comb notch or trap Output data rate 270 Mb s per SMPTE 259C Frequency response 0 1 dB to 5 75 MHz Differential gain 196 Differential phase 1 Signal to noise ratio 65 dB Bulk delay
269. version to from AES on I O modules MADI audio Embedded audio with the use of Audio De multiplexing and Multiplexing boards Module I O in groups of 8 or 9 inputs and 8 or 16 outputs Route to from digital and analog signals with no external processing Front loading hot swappable modules Redundancy power supplies resource modules signal paths throughout Enhanced control and monitoring capabilities Secure access rights with restrictions by level source and destination CCSP SNMP and third party protocol support Platinum IP3 Frame PX FR 28 The flagship frame in the Platinum IP3 system is a 28RU frame featuring 576 wideband video inputs distributed across 64 modular input slots and 1024 wideband video outputs distributed across 64 modular slots This can expand to 1152x1024 in two 28RU frames while providing 2N redundant crosspoint XPT modules See Video Matrix Expansion on page 29 The Platinum IP3 frame is similar to the 28RU Platinum frame with some modifications Larger matrix sizes are achieved via new crosspoint XPT modules a new backplane MI and new Input Output I O modules A new resource module PX RES provides greater processing capacity and an upgraded version of the Platinum TDM crosspoint module allows for twice the original matrix capacity The PX FR 28 frame uses common front loadable and hot swappable input and output modules The Platinum IP3 frame uses unique Video and Audio Crosspoint modules which
270. wo thumbscrews 9 Close the other fan array module Individual Fan To replace an individual front fan follow these steps 1 Open the front door of the frame and locate the faulty fan indicated by a red LED 2 Remove the two screws in the fan and unplug the wire harness using tweezers or needle nose pliers Unplug this connector Remove these screws Figure 131 Removing Individual Front Fan 3 Insert the replacement fan screw the fan into place and then re connect the wire harness Verify that the fan status LED is lit green 5 Close the front door of the frame 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 271 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual PX FRONT FAN and PX REAR FAN Modules Rear Fans A failed Rear Fan module is indicated by a red LED aN Figure 132 Rear Fan LED To remove and replace a Rear Fan Module follow these steps 1 Remove the four captive screws in the corners of the fan unit Figure 133 Rear Fan Carefully slide the fan straight out Confirm the correct orientation of the replacement fan the electrical connector should be in the bottom left corner then slide the new fan into position 4 Secure the Rear Fan module to the frame by tightening the four captive screws 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 272 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manua
271. ximum common mode rejection The signals are converted from balanced to single ended by the receivers and are then attenuated and AC coupled to the second stage attenuators Digitally controlled audio attenuators provide users with the ability to set digital full scale to a variety of analog audio levels These low noise low distortion attenuators can be software controlled to provide a wide range of full scale settings The output signals from the second stage are then buffered and converted to differential signals in preparation for presentation to the converters along with a gain adjustment to compensate for the first stage attenuation required prior to the digital attenuators The final analog stage provides low pass filtering and the addition of a DC offset before presenting the audio signal to the A D converter 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 190 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Analog Digital Audio Converter Modules with TDM A D Conversion Analog to digital conversion is provided by quad channel 24 bit oversampling delta sigma converters supporting sampling frequencies up to 192 kHz These converters provide DC bias voltage outputs digital decimation and high pass filtering and audio input clipping detection AES Outputs The FPGA receives the audio samples from the converters where they are formatted into AES data streams The FPGA inserts channel statu
272. y equipment may not always have the PCM Non PCM Channel Status Bits set correctly when transporting Dolby E The PCM non PCM Channel Status bit short Cbit is intended to indicate that the embedded AES3 data stream is of non PCM nature see also SMPTE 337M Dolby E Detection based on the presence of a Dolby E Header is an alternative method and should be used in cases where the Cbit is incorrectly set It is important for the downstream Audio processing to know what type of Audio linear PCM or non PCM it is dealing with in order to not to destroy Dolby E data for instance by the sample rate conversion process linear PCM data would normally undergo Based on the detected Dolby E Header an incorrectly set Cbit can be corrected for non PCM Audio data Dolby E that exits the board via TDM If the correction is not enabled a TDM Receiver without Dolby E Header detection correction will not be able to identify the audio stream as non PCM hence Dolby E data might get destroyed on its path through the Output processing module 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 158 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Frame Synchronizer and Multiplexer Demultiplexer Modules Audio Embedding Modes Each video channel has an audio embedder component composed of several smaller subcomponent blocks e One ancillary data stripper ADS e Four audio embedding subcomponents The first subc
273. ync input automatically detects and locks to NTSC PAL analog HD Tri Level or AES signals The control system reports the presence and type of sync signal detected on each of the four inputs These synchronization signals are made available to and are distributed by the Resource Modules to every crosspoint and output monitoring I O module in the frame Sync signals distributed from the Resource Module remain undisturbed when switching over to a redundant Resource Module In addition Resource Modules automatically generate and distribute an internal synchronization signal when no external sync input is present 2015 Imagine Communications Corp Proprietary and Confidential February 2015 Page 41 Platinum IP3 Installation and Operation Manual Resource Module PX RES If needed optional Sync Distribution Modules may be added to the frame to distribute external and internal sync signals to all Input Output modules These Sync Distribution Modules also support redundant operation and have the capability to seamlessly switch over when the redundant module is removed e For user configurable references 4 discrete syncs or 2 syncs with redundant inputs are supported e Sync triggering supported based on reference detection e If no sync signals present switches occur asynchronously after a reasonable time out period 0 1 seconds from reception of command e For Sync references that are present but then removed or lost the router main
274. ynchronizer and Multiplexer Demultiplexer Modules Name Description Type _ Options increments Black Clip Enable x 8 Controls level clipping RW e Disable according to the Black e Enable Clip Level control Black Clip Level x 8 Sets the black clip level RW 47 9 to 47 9 mV 0 0 mV in 0 8 mV increments Hue x 8 Adjusts the hue of the RW 180 to 180 0 incoming digital video signal DEEMBEDDING FRAME SYNC Frame Sync Mode x 8 Sets the operational RW e Delay mode mode of the frame sync e Sync mode delay or sync Available with the optional Frame Sync license Frame Sync Status x 8 Indicates whether the RW e Sync Ext Lock frame sync is locked e Sync Local Lock and what it is locked to e Delay Mode e Delay Mismatch Fast Switch x 8 Enable fast switching RW e No e Yes Force Freeze x 8 Enables video freeze RW e No e Yes Force Freeze Mode x 8 Specifies the type of RW e Field 1 1080i 525i i freeze field 1 field 2 or 59 94 625i frame 50 1080sF e Field 2 e Frame 1080p 720p Loss of Video Mode Selects the output video RW e Pass mode when the input e Black video is disrupted ge Horizontal Phase x 8 Adjusts the horizontal RW e 0 000 us to 29 616 timing Note The usable range depends on the video standard us 1080p 30 1035i 60 e 0 000 us to 14 808 us 1080p 60 1080p 60 DL e 0 000 us to 29 646 us 1080p

Platinum™ IP3 - Imagine Communications

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Platinum&trade; IP3 - Imagine Communications

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Platinum™ IP3 - Imagine Communications